revised masterspec

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

CONCOURSE C/D REHABILITATION: 2010/2011 ROOF TOP UNIT REPLACEMENT

IT1001 METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT

VOLUME 1 OF 1

Prepared By:

PGAL 201 NORTH UNION STREET, SUITE 500

ALEXANDRIA, VIRGINIA 22314

703/836-0588

PGAL

September 14, 2010

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IT1001 CONCOURSE C/D REHABILITATION: 2010/2011 – ROOF TOP UNIT REPLACEMENT SEPTEMBER 14, 2010

SPECIFICATIONS TOC TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS Licensed Professional Certification LPC-01 to LPC-03

VOLUME 1 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 007300 Supplementary Conditions SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 012210 Measurement and Payment 012900 Application for Payment 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013233 Photographic Documentation 013300 Submittals 014000 Quality Requirements 014200 References 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017329 Cutting and Patching 017700 Project Closeout 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration and Training END OF GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP



FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 020111 Maintenance and Protection of Air Traffic DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE Not Used DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 05 – METALS 051200 Structural Steel DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 070151 Membrane Roofing Repair 072100 Thermal Insulation 078413 Penetration Firestopping DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS Not Used DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Not Used DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Not Used DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Not Used



DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Not Used END OF FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP



FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Not Used DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 220518 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping 220523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 220529 Hangars and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 230010 HVAC General Provisions 230130.51 HVAC Air Duct Cleaning 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230713 Duct Insulation 230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 231123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 232113 Hydronic Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 237413 Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION Not Used DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260500 Common Work Results 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 262726 Wiring Devices 262813 Fuses 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers



DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Not Used DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System END OF FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP



SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK Not Used DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Not Used DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES Not Used DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION Not Used FAA SPECIFICATIONS Not Used END OF SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


LICSENSED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION LPC - 1

LICENSED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION The following is a list of technical specifications included within this document that are certified by the PGAL licensed professional(s) with seal and signature as identified: 020111 Maintenance and Protection of Air Traffic 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 070151 Membrane Roofing Repair 072100 Thermal Insulation 078413 Penetration Firestopping


LICENSED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION LPC - 3

LICENSED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION The following is a list of technical specifications included within this document that are certified by the ReStl Designers, Inc. Consultants licensed professional(s) with seal and signature as identified: 051200 Structural Steel


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300 - 1

SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The articles and paragraphs of this Section represent supplements or additions to the Contract Provisions or the Special Provisions.

1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. During the period of this Project, the Authority anticipates that other construction contracts may be underway at or near the site of work of this Contract. A list of adjacent construction activities follows:

1. Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 – Gate Podiums 2. Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 – Ramp Lighting 3. Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 – Sign Replacement 4. Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 – Carpet Replacement

1.4 PERMITTING

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's “Building Codes Manual”. This manual describes Building Codes organization, Building Code inspection process, Certificate of Occupancy requirements, and information regarding elevators, escalators, and moving walks. Authority will file for and provide the construction permit.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF PEDESTRIAN AND VEHICULAR TRAFFIC

A. In regards to material deliveries and hauling of removed materials, the Contractor shall maintain adequate pedestrian and vehicular traffic flow and safety along the service roads, sidewalks, parking lots and other roadways on Airport property. Coordinate activities throughout the project in a manner that allows emergency access, without delays to emergency response vehicles, to all areas of the Project that are occupied by employees.

B. Prior to starting construction operations affecting pedestrian, vehicular, or aircraft traffic movement, submit and obtain the COTR's written approval of a Traffic Maintenance Plan. Develop plan in accordance with the safety requirements of the FAA, Airport Operations, and the Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Transportation’s “Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices”. Utilize the form indicated in the latest edition of the Virginia Department of Transportation’s “Virginia Work Area Protection Manual – Standards and Guidelines”.



C. It is anticipated that the Contractor will be required to operate cranes and stage equipment adjacent to the Concourse C/D facility at multiple successive locations for the duration of the performance of the work. The Contractor shall be limited to occupying only one location at a time to minimize loss of aircraft and airport operations areas. At each location where construction operations are required the Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary signage, low-profile barriers, and such other traffic control devices or personnel as required complying with approved Traffic Maintenance Plan.

D. Maintenance of traffic control devices shall be continuous and effective work prosecuted day by day with adequate equipment and forces to the end of project to ensure that aircraft operating areas and structures are maintained in satisfactory condition at all times, including maintaining barricades and warning signs as necessary for performance of the work.

E. Remove snow and control all ice within the project boundaries. Removal of snow and ice for the benefit of the traveling public will be performed by the Authority.

F. The Contractor shall bear all cost of traffic control and project site maintenance.

G. Keep the portions of the road and aircraft pavement surfaces being used by the public free from irregularities, obstructions, mud, dirt, snow, ice, and any characteristic that might present a hazard or annoyance to traffic in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated. Maintain a vacuum/sweeper and flusher truck at the site at all times to clean roadway and aircraft surfaces affected by construction traffic and perform cleaning operations regularly and at the request of Airport Operations or the COTR.

1.6 AIRFIELD AND TERMINAL BUILDING OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Work, or a portion thereof, will be performed in proximity to the Air Operations Area (AOA), including, active runways, taxiways, and aprons. Normal airport operations will continue adjacent to the Work during all phases of the Project. These activities include:

1. Aircraft movement on runways, taxiways, aprons; aircraft landing and takeoff operations. 2. Aircraft parking, refueling and other aircraft servicing. 3. Baggage handling. 4. Routine aircraft maintenance. 5. Apron maintenance, snow removal and ice control. 6. Mobile lounge (Shuttle) operations.

B. The Work, or a portion thereof, will be performed within and nearby the public Terminal or Concourse buildings. Normal airport operations and public activities will continue adjacent to the Work during all phases of the Project. These include:

1. Passenger enplaning and deplaning. 2. Passenger baggage deposit/retrieval. 3. Passenger ticketing operations. 4. Food/Concession services. 5. Ground transportation arrivals/departures. 6. Maintenance, custodial and support activities.



C. Phase construction activities as necessary to accommodate all airport operations without disruption. Adhere to all current Airport Orders and Instructions (O & Is), Airport Bulletins, and Airport Advisories. The Authority will provide relevant Orders and Instructions to Offerors in the Solicitation Package. Bulletins and Advisories will be provided to the offeror by the Authority as they are issued.

1.7 TENANT OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Work of this Project will be performed in close proximity to tenant-occupied areas. Coordinate and conduct work activities in such fashion that public circulation, tenant operations, and access to the tenant spaces will not be impaired in any manner except as detailed on Contractor's Work Plans. COTR will review and approve in writing all Work Plans.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Comply with all Federal, state and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment. Take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, rivers, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter.

B. Notify COTR immediately in the event that abnormalities, discolorations, odors, oil, or other signs of potential contamination by hazardous materials are encountered during any other construction activities. Follow with written notice within 24 hours, indicating date, time, and location of potential contaminants encountered. The COTR will provide further direction to Contractor regarding disposition of materials encountered.

C. All painted surfaces are assumed to contain lead-based paint. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations to work in these conditions. The removal and disposal of lead-based paint is part of this contract.

1.9 DAMAGES AND PRE-EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Be responsible for all damages caused by Contractor’s construction activities. Provide all labor, materials, etc. to return any damaged areas, systems or equipment to their original condition at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Perform a survey of pre-existing conditions in the vicinity of Contractor’s construction activities, utilizing photographs and other means as necessary to document existing damage or conditions. Submit two copies of this survey to the Contracting Officer within 21 calendar days after Notice-to-Proceed. This survey will assist in resolving any damage claims against the Contractor during and after construction.

1.10 SECURITY DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Maintain the integrity of the Airport Security fence. Maintain the integrity of doors and walls between public areas and Air Operations Area (AOA) at all times. Comply with Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1500, 1540, 1542 and 1544.



B. Possession of and display of a proper and current Airport Identification Badge, issued by Airport Operations is required for all Contractor personnel passing into the AOA. Refer to "Airport Orders and Instructions" attached as part of the Contract for specific requirements. Security requirements have increased significantly at Washington Dulles International Airport and Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport. Contractor can expect up to two hours waiting time to clear construction vehicles into the AOA. Offerors shall become intimately familiar with all TSA and Authority security requirements. No increase in contract price will be provided to the Contractor should the contractor not be aware of any security procedure in place at time of submitting their offer that leads to increased time and inconvenience to accomplish the work.

C. Under the requirements of Federal Security Directive 1542-04-8E, the Authority is submitting information from badge application forms to the Transportation Security Administration (TSA) through the Transportation Security Clearinghouse so the TSA can perform a Security Threat Assessment (STA) in addition to the fingerprint-based Criminal History Records Check (CHRC) the Authority is required to perform on all badge applicants. No badges are allowed to be issued to NEW applicants until final approval of the STA has been received.

1. TSA has estimated that the STA portion of this review may take as long as 3 to 14 days. 2. For specific questions contact the Pass and ID office at 703-572-2780.

D. In addition to the badge application requirements above, all workers required to perform

Contract work within the Concourse C/D Federal Inspection Services (FIS) area must have a U. S. Customs & Border Protection (CBP) seal on their airport ID badge. The process to obtain a Custom Seal is systematic and requires first for the company to get bonded, letters for each employee, a fee (currently $45) that must be paid at the time of application, and fingerprint and background check by CBP which in itself could take 7 to 14 days to complete. Within all FIS restricted areas under its jurisdiction, CBP does not allow badged workers with the Custom seal to escort unbadged workers or badged workers without a Custom Seal.

E. Pay all fines levied by the Transportation Security Administration, U.S. Customs & Border Protection, or both, for penalties resulting from security infractions perpetrated by or caused by Contractor’s personnel or work forces of Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers.

F. Establish and maintain the security of Contractor’s staging areas, equipment and materials.

G. Provide escort for delivery vehicles transporting materials and supplies to or from the Contractor's staging or work areas into the AOA, in accordance with requirements stated in "Airport Orders and Instructions" attached as part of the Contract.

H. Do not park within 300 feet of a terminal building unless specifically authorized by Airport Operations.

I. All workers in the sterile areas, which are defined as areas accessible to ticketed passengers only, may utilize tools in their work provided that:

1. Tools are essential and necessary to the Work. 2. Keep tools controlled at all times. 3. Do not leave tools unattended. 4. Store tools in locked boxes.

J. No knives will be permitted in the sterile areas.



K. No firearms or weapons of any type are allowed on the airport.

L. No cartridge style nail guns, nor any tools that use a cartridge or any explosive charge, are allowed without prior written notification of COTR. Obtain written approval from the COTR before bringing such tools on the project.

M. Conform to all Orders and Instructions pertaining to vehicle inspection. Pertinent Orders and Instructions are provided with The Authority’s solicitation documents.

1.11 MATERIAL HAULING

A. Restrict deliveries and removal of bulk materials, supplies, waste soils and equipment to and from the Project site to the Authority-designated roads and haul routes indicated on the Drawings.

B. Access and egress to and from the Airport for hauling operations shall be through the entrances indicated. Hauling operations may occur at any time, with prior approval of COTR in association with Airport Operations.

C. Haul routes for this project are as indicated. Under no conditions shall the Contractor plan use of taxiways and taxi lanes for hauling equipment.

D. Be responsible for the cost of the immediate cleaning of spills on paved surfaces resulting from the Contractor's operations.

E. Provide sweeper/vacuum equipment with a usable hopper capacity of 6 cubic yards and with a regenerative air capacity of 15,000 CFM.

1.12 PORTABLE LIGHTING

A. Portable lighting: If used for Contractor operations, aim and shield portable lighting at all times to eliminate glare that could impair runway, taxiway, apron, ground operations, and Airport Traffic Control Tower operations. Equip portable lighting with reflectors and glare shields to prevent spillover of light into operational areas.

1.13 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide two-way radio communication between certain of the Contractor’s personnel on the job site. Provide radios with a minimum of 5 watts transmitting power. Select the frequency utilized for these transmissions. Submit proposed frequencies to COTR for approval in writing by the COTR. Frequencies shall not conflict with or overlay any of the Airports radio frequencies.

B. Provide, at a minimum, the following with radio equipment: The Project Superintendent, Foreman of all work groups physically separated from the general vicinity of the Project Superintendent, gate guards, and others who may be working in a separate and remote area. Provide two additional radios with the same frequencies to PMC for use by the COTR and the Lead Inspector.



1.14 SPECIAL AUTHORITY CONSULTANT

A. The Contractor is hereby advised of the involvement of Parsons Management Consultants (PMC) as Program Management Support Services Consultant to the Authority for the capital construction programs at Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport and Washington Dulles International Airport. PMC will have a continuing role in this project by assisting the Authority in specialized areas.

1. PMC will provide administrative support during design, solicitation, and construction. 2. PMC will coordinate Contractor requests for technical information and receive, review

and manage all Contractor submittals. 3. PMC has reviewed technical submittals during design, including drawings, specifications,

cost estimates, construction phasing plans, and technical reports. 4. PMC will be responsible for review of technical submittals during construction, including

selected shop drawings, certifications, test reports, calculations and samples. 5. PMC will conduct field inspections of the Work in progress and inspect for Substantial

Completion and Final Acceptance. PMC inspection does not relieve Contractor of responsibilities of performing Contract required inspections as required by contract documents.

B. All other contract management is the sole responsibility of the Authority.

1.15 SAFETY

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the most current edition of the Authority Construction Safety Manual”. Offerors are provided with the most recent addition when obtaining contract documents prior to proposal. Requirements included in this Section are in addition to the Authority’s Construction Safety Manual. Comply with all local, State and Federal requirements. Where conflicts or discrepancies exist between requirements, the more stringent requirement shall govern. For additional information see Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”.

B. Contractor Safety Organization:

1. Safety Engineer.

a. Duties: Outlined in The Authority Construction Safety Manual. b. Qualifications: Outlined in The Authority Construction Safety Manual.

C. The Contractor shall submit the résumé of the individual proposed to serve in the role of Contractor’s Safety Engineer to the COTR for approval in writing. In addition to indicating the qualifications in the Authority Construction Safety Manual résumés shall include but not be limited to such items as: work experience, education, safety and health training completed, memberships in professional associations, professional certifications, professional registrations and professional references confirming the qualifications and personal references of contacts for verification shall also be required. Documentation confirming the qualifications and personal references of contacts for verification shall also be required.

D. Provide safe and healthful working conditions on each operation at all times during execution the work of this Contract. Conduct the various operations connected with the Work so that they will not be injurious to safety or health. Comply with all provisions, regulations and



recommendations issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and the Construction Safety Act of 1969, as well as amendments to these laws. Comply with laws, rules and regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction, with regard to all matters relating to the safety and health of workers and the general public. Compliance with government requirements is mandated by law and considered only a minimum level of safety performance. Perform all work in accordance with best safe work practices recognized by the construction industry. Stop work whenever a work procedure or a condition at a work site is deemed unsafe by the either of the following individuals: COTR, Program Safety Manager (PSM), the Contractor’s Project Manager, the Contractor’s Foreman, or the Contractor’s Safety Engineer(s).

E. Provide a full-time on-site Contractor Safety Engineer for the duration of this contract. The Safety Engineer shall be responsible for all safety and health requirements as included herein and as required by the Authority’s Construction Safety Manual.

F. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's "Construction Safety Manual." Provide during the Work the services of the Safety Engineer as outlined in the Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” and in Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”. The Safety Engineer shall undertake the duties and responsibilities as stated in the Authority's "Construction Safety Manual".

G. Prior to start of construction activities in the Air Operations Area (AOA), the Contractor's Safety Engineer shall tour the AOA with the Authority Safety Program Manager.

H. Flagmen Training: The Authority will sponsor Flagman training sessions. Contractor's personnel who will be assigned flagmen duties on the Airport for this project shall attend training sessions.

I. Fire Safety: Conform to the following requirements:

1. Obtain a permit to perform any welding, cutting, or hot work from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal.

2. Ensure adequate access to all construction areas for emergency response. 3. Obtain a permit from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal to store, handle, or use any

hazardous material, including but not limited to fuels for equipment. Complete an application prior to issuance.

4. Remove combustible debris from the site daily. 5. Provide at least seven (7) days notice for any request for inspections, tests, permits, etc.,

required of personnel from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal. 6. Provide to the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal a list of emergency contact numbers

for the COTR and the Contractor prior to the commencement of Work.

J. Submit Site-Specific Safety and Health Plans to COTR within 15 calendar days of Notice to Proceed and prior to the start of any construction activities. Prepare this plan using the Authority’s Guidelines as defined in the Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” and as supplemented by these specifications for each and every work zone as shown on the drawings or as anticipated by the Contractor. COTR must approve the Site-Specific Safety Plan prior to the start of any work.

K. Be responsible for the safe operation of all job site motor vehicles. Provide a “spotter” or flagman for all backing operations of construction vehicles with restricted rear vision.



L. For all airside projects attach a Safety Plan to the Safety Program. Include in the Safety Plan, to the extent applicable, provisions for the following:

1. Scope of work performed by Contractor, including proposed duration of work. 2. Possible safety problems. 3. Work control measures. 4. Limitations on equipment height. 5. Location of airport operational areas. 6. Location of and access to stockpiled construction materials and equipment. 7. Inspection requirements. 8. Trenches and excavations, and cover requirements. 9. Threshold marking and lighting. 10. Closed runway marking. 11. Vehicle operation and pedestrian access in airport movement areas. 12. Construction site access and haul roads, includes maintenance of and keeping open ARFF

access routes. 13. Limitations on construction. 14. Radio communications. 15. Foreign object debris (FOD) control provisions. 16. Hazardous materials (HAZMAT) management. 17. Wildlife abatement. 18. NOTAM issuance. 19. Vehicle identification. 20. Vehicle parking. 21. Use of temporary visual aids. 22. Obstacle-free zones (OFZ). 23. Approach clearance to runways. 24. Runway and taxiway safety areas. 25. Procedures and equipment, such as barricades (identify type) for closing portions of the

movement area. 26. Required compliance of contractor personnel. 27. Procedures for notification of aircraft rescue firefighting (ARFF) if deactivating water

lines or fire hydrants, or if emergency access routes are rerouted or blocked. 28. Emergency notification for fire, medical, and police response. 29. Coordination of plan with an FAA airport certification safety inspector.

M. All motorized equipment and vehicles working on or entering MWAA construction project work areas shall be equipped with functional audible backup alarms.

N. Crane Operators. On Airports Authority projects, Crane Operators shall be certified to operate the equipment by an approved independent certifying agency.

1.16 HEIGHT LIMITATION

A. For all demolition and construction within the Airport, limit the height of Contractor's equipment to a maximum of 120 feet. Submit to COTR, a list equipment with heights greater than 35 feet.

B. Prior to beginning any work coordinate with the COTR the height of all cranes, boom trucks, scaffolds or similar vehicles of construction. Properly mark all construction equipment with safety flags and warning lights in accordance with current FAA and Airport Operations



requirements. Submit FAA Form 7460, provided by COTR, for all variations on approved crane heights.

1.17 NOISE CONTROL

A. The Authority recognizes and can tolerate a normal level of noise created by a majority of construction activity. However, in the interest of the Authority's neighbors, the maximum acceptable noise level between the hours of 5:00 pm and 7:00 am the following morning is limited to 55 decibels. During daytime hours of 7:00 am through 5:00 pm, the maximum acceptable noise level for sustained or repetitive noises is 72 decibels. Measure noise levels using an "A" scale at a point 4'-0" above ground at property line nearest noise source.

B. Secure advance written approval from the COTR prior to scheduling any activity that is anticipated to produce a sustained or repetitive noise level higher than the decibel limits indicated above.

C. In and around terminal facilities and buildings whose normal occupancy is from 7 a.m. to 7 p.m., perform work that causes noise that is disruptive to the airport’s tenants or the traveling public between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:00 am. Measure noise for this situation using an “A” scale at a point 4’-0” above ground at the closest point to airport tenants or the traveling public.

1.18 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK

A. The offeror is expected to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the proposal, plans, specifications, solicitation provisions, contract provisions, special provisions and contract forms before submitting a proposal. The submission of a proposal will be considered conclusive evidence that the offeror has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the Work as to the requirements of the Contract.

1.19 AIRPORT SECURITY/VEHICLE INSPECTION PROCEDURE

A. The number of vehicular access points into secure areas at IAD has been reduced to an operational minimum. Those gates that remain open are divided into two categories:

1. Vehicular gates for approved vehicles and individuals who hold appropriate and valid airport access media and do not require escorts.

2. Vehicular gates for those vehicles that have invalid or no airport access authorization and/or the vehicle operator and passenger(s) do not have valid access authorization media and require escorts.

B. The access points for vehicle operator and passenger(s) who have appropriate and valid airport access media are Gates 313 and 225. Vehicles that require escorts of any type are prohibited at gate 127.

C. All vehicles and personnel that will require an escort shall enter the AOA via Gate 313, Gate 225, or Gate 118. The vehicle gates at Gate 118 and Gate 141 are designated as AOA entry points for vehicles and persons that require an escort and their primary work site is located on the north side of the airport. Gate 313 is designated as large equipment contractor/construction



access point, and Gate 317 is to be used by contractors and employees whose primary work site is located on the south side of the airport. These access gates are as indicated.

D. The following procedures will be utilized for all escorted vehicles and AOA approved vehicles with non-badged passengers seeking entry to the AOA:

1. All vehicles are searched. 2. Coordinate all vehicle deliveries with the COTR in advance. Provide the vehicle license

plate number and expected delivery time for all vehicle deliveries. Contractor may compile the expected daily delivery schedule on one sheet for submission to the COTR.

3. The vehicle operator shall have in his or her possession a commercial manifest, which identifies the contents of the vehicle and/or trailer.

4. An escort from the company for whom the shipment is intended shall respond to the vehicle access gate and remain with the vehicle until the vehicle exits the secured area.

5. A vehicle search will be conducted and once cleared; vehicles will be permitted escorted access to their delivery point.

6. Contractors should expect delays up to 1 hour at Gate 313 as a result of these security provisions. The longest waits are anticipated to be between 6:00 a.m. and 7:30 a.m.

7. Priority consideration may be offered to concrete trucks with resulting delays estimated to be 20 minutes. To receive priority consideration, schedule concrete deliveries with Airport Operations and COTR at time of batching.

E. Prior approval from the Manager of Airport Operations or his/her designated representative is required for any exceptions to the above procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 007300


SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. 4. Work under other contracts. 5. Authority-furnished products. 6. Use of premises. 7. The Authority's occupancy requirements. 8. Work restrictions: Contractor Hours of Operation. 9. Specification formats and conventions. 10. Marking utility services. 11. Utility outages.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of the Authority's facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 –Roof Top Unit (RTU) Replacement project.

1. Project Location: Concourse C/D, Washington Dulles International Airport.

B. Architect/Engineer Identification: The Contract Documents, dated September 2010, were prepared for Project by PGAL, 201 North Union Street, Suite 500, Alexandria, VA 22314 and HCYu and Associates, 1013 Technology Drive, Glen Allen, VA 23059.

C. Construction Manager: Parsons Management Consultants has been engaged as Construction Manager for this Project to serve as an advisor to the Authority and to provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction between the Authority and Contractor, according to a separate contract between the Authority and Construction Manager.

1. For additional functions of Parsons Management Consultants, see "Supplementary Conditions."


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

D. The Work consists of improvements to select rooftop HVAC equipment at Concourse C/D.

1. The Work includes the following:

a. Replacement and refurbishment of existing rooftop HVAC air handling units (RTU).

b. Upgrade and replacement of select electrical components associated with the RTU’s.

c. Installation of plumbing piping and hose bibs to service RTU’s.

d. Installation of GFI outlets to support RTU maintenance activities.

e. Salvage and re-install lightning protection air terminals from existing RTU’s scheduled for demolition, onto new replacement RTU’s.

f. Restoration/Repair of existing roof membrane and flashing at replaced RTU’s.

g. Addition of structural steel reinforcement at two beams supporting RTU No. 234.

2. For additional requirements for the examination of plans, specifications, and Project site, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.

1.5 WORK PHASES

A. Construct the Project in phases as noted on the Drawings and as indicated herein.

B. See Contractor’s Hours of Operation herein for work hour restrictions.

C. Work shall be phased such that no two adjacent RTU’s are unoperational at the same time.

D. The Contractor will be working on and adjacent to active aircraft and aircraft support operating areas. The Contractor shall schedule the execution of the Work to minimize impact to the operations at the Airport and Airport tenants.

E. If required for the performance of the Work, only one Concourse C/D aircraft gate position can be closed at a time and then only for one work shift at a time. Equipment and construction materials shall be secured and relocated in such a manner to allow the affected aircraft gate position to be fully operational after each work shift. Provide schedule indicating impact to aircraft gate positions for approval by the COTR.

F. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule to COTR showing the sequence, the commencement and completion dates, and the move-out and move-in dates of personnel for the various phases of the Work.

G. On completion, each phase of the Work shall be fully operational.


SUMMARY 011000 - 3

1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: Authority has separate contracts for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1. Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 – Gate Podiums 2. Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 – Ramp Lighting 3. Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 – Signs 4. Concourse C/D Rehabilitation: 2010/2011 – Carpet Replacement

1.7 AUTHORITY-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. There are no Authority provided items for this project.

1.8 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to limits indicated on Drawings. Contractor shall use the designated haul routes and shall coordinate construction activities with the COTR. Interference with the Authority, airline, tenant or FAA operations or aircraft movements is prohibited.

2. Authority Occupancy: Allow for Authority occupancy of site and day-to-day use by tenants, air carriers, and the public.

3. Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations within the Contract Limit Lines indicated during construction period, during the hours indicated, and as directed by COTR. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by the Authority's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

4. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to the Authority, the Authority's employees, tenants, air carriers, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use driveways and entrances for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

B. Utilize areas designated for Contractor staging, storage, and parking, as indicated. For additional requirements, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

C. Use of Existing Buildings: Maintain existing buildings in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect buildings and their occupants during construction period.


SUMMARY 011000 - 4

1. Contractor shall not be allowed within limits of Customs and Border Protection (CBP)-controlled areas of the Concourse C FIS facility without proper security badges. All Contractor personnel shall be required to maintain CBP-approved airport security badges. Escorting of personnel possessing a non-CBP-approved airport security badge, or personnel without badges, will not be allowed.

2. For additional requirements for airfield and terminal buildings, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

1.9 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Authority Occupancy: The Authority and/or its tenants will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with COTR during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Authority usage, and perform the Work so as not to interfere with day-to-day Airport operations.

B. Partial Authority Occupancy: The Authority will occupy, and place and install equipment, in completed areas of building before Substantial Completion of each phase. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. Partial Authority occupancy requirement are as follows:

1. COTR will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Authority occupancy.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from the Authority Building Codes/Environmental Department before Authority occupancy.

3. Before partial Authority occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, the Authority will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building.

4. On occupancy, the Authority will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.

C. For additional requirements for tenant operational requirements, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

1.10 CONTRACTOR HOURS OF OPERATION

A. The Authority anticipates that the Contractor may be required to work multiple shifts to accomplish the work of this Contract within the established schedule.

B. Contractor Working Hours:

1. Contractor will be allowed and may be required by the nature of the Project to work seven days a week in the performance of the Work. Work is subject to restrictions of the Airport operational requirements and the time constraints noted herein. Notify the COTR 24-hours in advance of any change to the work schedule

2. Work associated with electrical, plumbing, duct cleaning, HVAC system balancing and all other work required to be performed within the public occupied areas of the interior of the Concourse C/D shall be restricted to the hours of 10:30 PM to 5:30 AM.


SUMMARY 011000 - 5

3. Work associated with installation of structural steel reinforcement for RTU No. 234 shall be performed between the hours of 10:30 PM and 5:30 AM. The required structural Work includes, but is not limited to removal and replacement of existing accessible suspended ceiling, removal of existing fire proofing material, temporary supporting/relocation of existing building elements and installation of required reinforcing steel members as further defined in the construction documents. The Work required is located in the main public circulation of Concourse C/D. The Contractor shall phase the Work so that the Work area and public floor areas are cleaned and fully operational daily after each night’s work period.

4. The replacement/refurbishment of the RTU’s and all other work exterior to the Concourse C/D facility may be performed any time except as such work disrupts operations of the airport and its airline tenants. Work requiring the staging of cranes, materials and other equipment that requires the closing of an aircraft gate position or interferes with any other airport/aircraft operations shall not be performed during the hours 2:30 PM to 10:30 PM unless otherwise approved by the COTR.

1.11 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 34-Division format using the CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat 2004" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section titles to help with cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete as all available Sections and Section numbers are not used and the CSI numbering system is not sequentially complete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Interpret words and meanings as appropriate. Infer words implied, but not stated, as the sense requires. Interpret singular words as plural, and plural words as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are used in these Specifications. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.


SUMMARY 011000 - 6

1.12 MARKING UTILITY SERVICES

A. It is not anticipated that locating underground utilities will be required. If required for the performance of the Work, employ underground utilities location subcontractor to locate and mark the horizontal location of all utility lines that might be impacted by construction activities, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Electric power lines. 2. Natural gas lines. 3. Sanitary Sewers. 4. Storm Sewers. 5. FAA communications, signal, and security lines. 6. Runway lighting lines 7. Water supply piping. 8. Fuel Lines. 9. Telephone lines. 10. Data lines. 11. Underground Storage Tanks. 12. High Temperature Hot Water (HTHW) and chilled water lines. 13. Dedicated Fire System (DFS) lines.

B. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk at (703) 417-8300 a minimum of 72 hours prior to starting activities that include but are not limited to location and marking of horizontal locations of telephone and telecommunications lines belonging to the Authority as part of the Airport Communication System. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk a minimum of 72 hours prior to beginning operations, that include but are not limited to excavating, boring, pile-driving, , digging or planting. Note the ACS does not locate utilities. Location is the responsibility of the Contractor’s underground utilities location subcontractor. The Airport Communications System (ACS) is merely notified as indicated previously.

C. The information in the Contract Documents concerning the type and location of underground utilities is neither guaranteed nor inclusive. The Contractor is responsible for determining the type and location of underground utilities, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, so as to avoid damage thereto.

D. Check and verify the horizontal and vertical location (coordinates and elevation) of all utility lines that may exist within the limits of new work, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, by use of a Subsurface Utility Engineering company. Reconfirm such locations and verification of utilities discovered, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, and submit to the COTR a dimensional survey with such notations.

E. Dig test pits by hand shovel in the vicinity of the discovered utilities. Excavate test holes utilizing a vacuum excavator.

F. Repair any damage to discovered utility lines due to construction operations at no expense to the Authority. The Authority will assist the Contractor by making available any known information.

G. Submit to the COTR, for written approval, the name of the independent subsurface utility engineering company to be used.


SUMMARY 011000 - 7

H. The individual who performs the utility detection and location work shall have as a minimum five (5) years of similar experience in the area of subsurface utility detection and location engineering.

I. Submit to COTR the following:

1. List of utility detection equipment along with product information and data sheets that will be used specifically for this contract.

2. List of employee qualifications and résumés of those individuals who will be assigned specifically to this contract.

3. Within 60 calendar days of Notice to Proceed, a survey of all subsurface utility engineering results indicating the horizontal and vertical location, coordinates and elevation of all utilities.

1.13 UTILITY OUTAGES

A. Prior to any utility outage/interruption, prepare a schedule of such outage. Include in outage schedule duration, identification of the service affected, temporary utility service to be provided, identification of available service alternative, and the action to be taken in the ` of any emergency. Apply for all outages of utility systems in writing. Fully coordinate outage requests with COTR. Obtain approval in writing by COTR. Schedule all outages at least three (3) weeks in advance with a 96-hour notification provided by the Contractor confirming date, time, and duration. Outages will normally be scheduled to occur between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:30 am, Tuesday through Thursday.





MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 012210 - 1

SECTION 012210 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing methods of measurement and computations to be used in determination of quantities of material furnished and unit amount of Work performed under the Contract in order for Contractor to receive payment according to agreed-upon unit prices.

B. At the discretion of the COTR, payment may be reduced for any Work which is not in full compliance with the Contract Documents or which has been damaged or repaired by Contractor. Such action may be used when the end product may have a reduced service life or less than desirable aesthetic characteristics.

C. Descriptions of unit-price items, if required, will be specified in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."

1.3 MEASUREMENT OF QUANITITES

A. All volumes or quantities used to determine unit-price payment will be measured by COTR, or by COTR’s authorized representatives, using methods generally recognized as conforming to good engineering practice. Unless otherwise indicated, measurement shall be in U.S. Customary Units of Measurement.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, longitudinal measurements for area computations will be made horizontally, and no deductions will be made for individual fixtures (or leave-outs) having an area of 9 sq. ft. or less. Unless otherwise indicated, transverse measurements for area computations will be the neat dimensions shown on Drawings.

1. Structures will be measured according to neat lines shown on the plans or as altered to fit field conditions.

2. Measure all Contract items measured by the linear foot, such as electrical ducts, conduits, pipe culverts, under drains, and similar items, parallel to the base of foundation on which such items are placed, unless otherwise indicated .

3. In computing volumes of excavation, use the average end area method or other acceptable method.

C. The thickness of plates and galvanized sheet used in the manufacture of corrugated metal pipe, metal plate pipe culverts and arches, and metal cribbing will be specified and measured in decimal fraction of inches.



D. Haul materials, to be measured by volume in the hauling vehicle, in approved vehicles and measured therein at the point of delivery. Vehicles for this purpose may be of any size or type acceptable to and approved in advance by COTR, provided that the body is of such shape that the actual contents may be readily and accurately determined. Load all vehicles to at least their water-level capacity. Level loads when the vehicles arrive at the point of delivery.

1. When requested by Contractor and approved by COTR in writing, material specified to be measured by the cubic yard may be weighed, and such weights will be converted to cubic yards for payment purposes. Factors for conversion from weight measurement to volume measurement will be determined by COTR and agreed to by Contractor before such method of measurement of pay quantities is used.

2. The term "ton" will mean the short ton consisting of 2000-lb avoirdupois. Weigh all materials, which are measured or proportioned by weights, on accurate, approved scales by competent, qualified personnel at locations designated by COTR.

a. If material is shipped by rail, the car weight may be accepted, provided that only the actual weight of material will be paid for. However, car weights will not be acceptable for material to be passed through mixing plants.

b. Weigh trucks used to haul material being paid for by weight empty daily at such times as COTR directs. Each truck shall bear a plainly legible identification mark.

E. Measure bituminous materials by the gallon or ton. When measured by volume, measure such volumes at 60 deg F or measure corrected to the volume at 60 deg F, using ASTM D 1250 for asphalts or ASTM D 633 for tars.

1. Net certified scale weights or weights based on certified volumes in the case of rail shipments will be used as a basis of measurement, subject to correction when bituminous material has been lost from the car or the distributor, wasted, or otherwise not incorporated into the Work.

2. When bituminous materials are shipped by truck or transport, net certified weights by volume, subject to correction for loss or foaming, may be used for computing quantities.

F. Concrete will be measured by the cubic yard in place, unless otherwise indicated.

G. The term "each" when used as an item of payment shall mean complete payment for the work described in the Contract.

1. When a complete structure or structural unit is to be provided, and "each" is specified, as the unit of measurement, the unit will be construed to include all necessary fitting, accessories, and work incidental to the work item.

H. Rental of equipment will be measured by time in hours of actual working time and necessary traveling time of the equipment within the limits of the Work. Special equipment ordered by COTR in connection with "force account work" will be measured as agreed in Contract Modification authorizing such force account work as provided in the Contract Documents.

I. When standard manufactured items are specified such as fence, wire, plates, rolled shapes, pipe conduit, etc., and these items are identified by gage, unit weight, section dimensions, etc., such identification will be considered to be nominal weights or dimensions. Unless more stringently controlled by tolerances in cited Specifications, manufacturing tolerances established by the industries involved will be accepted.



J. When estimated quantities for a specific portion of the Work are designated as the pay quantities in the Contract, they shall be the final quantities for which payment for such specific portion of the Work will be made, unless the dimensions of said portions of the Work shown on Drawings are revised by Contract Modification signed by the Contracting Officer.

1. If revised dimensions result in an increase or decrease in quantities of such Work, final quantities for payment will be revised in the amount represented by the authorized changes in the dimensions.

1.4 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND

A. Partial payments may be made to the extent of the delivered cost of materials to be incorporated into the Work, provided that such materials meet the requirements of the Contract, Drawings, and Specifications and are delivered to acceptable sites on the Airport property or at other sites in the vicinity that are acceptable to COTR. Such delivered costs of stored or stockpiled materials may be included in the next partial payment application after the following conditions are met:

1. COTR accepts the manner in which the material has been stored at or on an approved site.

2. Contractor provides COTR with acceptable evidence of quantity and quality of the materials.

3. Contractor provides COTR with acceptable evidence that the material and transportation costs have been paid.

4. Contractor provides the Authority legal title, free of liens or encumbrances of any kind, to the material so stored and stockpiled.

5. Contractor provides the Authority evidence that the material so stored or stockpiled is insured against loss by damage to or disappearance of such materials at anytime before use in the Work.

6. Contractor provides the Authority with manufacturer’s installation and maintenance information.

B. It is understood and agreed that the transfer of title and the Authority's payment for such stored or stockpiled materials shall in no way relieve Contractor of responsibilities for furnishing and placing such materials according to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. In no case will the amount of partial payments of materials on hand exceed the Contract price for the materials or the Contract price for the Contract item in which the material is intended to be used.

D. No partial payment will be made for living or perishable plant materials.

E. Contractor bears all costs associated with the partial payment of stored or stockpiled materials according to the provisions of this Section.


APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 – APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with Contract CPM Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Log.


1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for submittal of items required before final payment.

3. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for procedural requirements governing the submission of Project Record Documents.

4. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for submittal of items required before final payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and once accepted, to be used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contract CPM Schedule. d. List of products. e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.



2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Contracting Officer at earliest possible date, but no later than 21 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed.

a. On projects requiring cost-loaded CPM Schedules, the accepted cost loading will satisfy the requirements for the Schedule of Values.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values.

a. Project name and location. b. Name of COTR. c. Name of Architect/Engineer. d. The Authority’s Project number. e. Contractor's name and address. f. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Contract Modifications (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Price to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for the following items. The value assigned to the total of these line items shall be 5 percent of the Contract Price:

a. Testing and commissioning activities. b. Operation and Maintenance manuals. c. Punch list activities. d. Project Record Documents. e. Bonds and warranties. f. Demonstration and training.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar. Total shall equal the Contract Price. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Application for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.



a. Differentiate between potential items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. At COTR’s option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values with the next Applications for Payment when Contract Modifications result in a change in the Contract Price.

a. Indicate each Contract modification as a new line item.

1.5 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Contracting Officer and paid for by the Authority.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Application for Payment shall coincide with CPM schedule monthly update, or as otherwise indicated in the Agreement between the Authority and Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and shall not exceed one calendar month, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Contracting Officer, but supplied by COTR, for Application for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Authority will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Contract Modifications issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit one original and four copies of Application for Payment to the address indicated in the Section VII - Contract Provision, paragraph 0.4.B, each one signed and notarized. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.



1. Transmit Applications for Payment with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application in a manner acceptable to Contracting Officer.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers.

1. The Authority reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to the Authority.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of pre-construction conference. 13. Performance and payment bonds. 14. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 15. Submittal and approval of Contractor Safety Plan. 16. Subcontractor Payment Form: (Form J, "Contract Conditions," Section IX, "LDBE").

H. Monthly Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall accompany the submittal of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment include the following:

1. Subcontractor Payment Form. 2. Monthly Progress Report, prepared according to requirements specified in Division 01

Section "Construction Progress Documentation." 3. Evidence of payment for material on-site if reimbursement for such material is being

requested. 4. Updated Inspection Control Log. Highlight changes from previous month. 5. Davis-Bacon verification if applicable. 6. Update of Contract Record Documents.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price.



2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Authority occupancy of designated portions of the Work, if applicable.

3. Advise COTR of change-over in security provisions.

J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Price. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when the Authority took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

6. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Return of all Airport identification badges and keys.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings.

a. Pre-award conference. b. Pre-construction conference. c. Pre-installation conference. d. Progress meetings. e. Partnering meetings.


1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for coordinating Contract closeout.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.



3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, mechanical, electrical, and otherwise. Contractor is cautioned that, where specific dimensions are not indicated or where Drawings are schematic in nature, as with most Electrical and Mechanical Drawings, Contractor shall have sole responsibility to coordinate the work to meet this requirement. Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings to COTR for review and approval as provided in "Coordination Drawings" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article of this Section.

4. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for COTR and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work and completion within the specified Contract duration. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Start-up, check-out, and final acceptance of systems. 8. Project closeout activities. 9. Protection of existing and new work.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as the Authority's property.

E. Temporary Utility Outages: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings:

1. Prepare Coordination Drawings as specified under “Coordination Drawings” below. 2. Submit Coordination Drawings within 120 days of Contract execution, but not less than

75 days prior to date required by Contractor so as not to delay the Work.



B. Key Personnel Names: At the pre-construction meeting, submit a list of Contractor's key personnel assignments. Key personnel shall include but not necessarily be limited to Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Safety Manager, Safety Engineer, Quality Control Manager, Project Scheduler, Soil Excavation Engineers, and other personnel in attendance at Project site along with alternates. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep the list current at all times.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor

will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Contract Name 2. Contract Number 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Resident Engineer 6. Name of Task Manager 7. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, color photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs:

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.



D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 2. RFI must be signed and scanned for electronic transmission. 3. Hard-Copy RFI shall follow Software-Generated RFI for the record.

E. COTR’s Action: COTR will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow fourteen (14) calendar days for COTR's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. COTR's action may include a request for additional information, in which case COTR's time for response will start again.

3. COTR's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify COTR in writing within ten (10) days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. On receipt of COTR’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify COTR within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly prior to progress meeting for inclusion in progress meeting minutes. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name of COTR. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date COTR’s response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.



1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. General:

1. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.

2. Indicate all dimensions provided on Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment, minimum clearance requirements, amounts of equipment and material to be installed, or other requirements. Provide alternate sketches for resolution of such conflicts to COTR for review. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations shall not be considered changes to the Contract.

3. Maintain Coordination Drawings at Project site available for reference to COTR. 4. Keep reproducible originals of Coordination Drawings updated with revisions to reflect

actual construction. Make drawing revisions at time of change to construction.

B. Organize Coordination Drawing submittals as follows:

1. Floor plans: Provide Coordination Drawings for foundations and underground facilities.

C. Include signature of representative of each trade or Subcontractor affected on Coordination Drawings, verifying their review and approval that their respective Work has been coordinated with each other trade and with architectural and structural Work.

D. Format:

1. Prepare Coordination Drawings in uniform size on paper sheets. Print the Work of each trade as a different color.

2. Use reproducible copies for coordination between trades. 3. Use scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0". Detail complex areas at larger scale than typical

floor plans. 4. Do not use Contract Drawings as Coordination Drawings. 5. Use a common architectural layout as background. 6. Indicate duct work and pipes with 6 inch diameter and greater by double lines. Use

single lines for smaller mechanical conduits and all electrical Work. Draw busways to scale.

7. Circle and clearly note deviations from Contract Documents with reason for deviation stated.

E. Content:

1. Electrical Work, including telecommunications 2. Existing Steel Framing. 3. Existing Ceiling systems (ground floor). 4. New Podiums.



1.7 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project Superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Pre-award Conference:

1. General: At the request of the Contracting Officer, a pre-award conference with Contractor may be held before actual award of the Contract. The meeting will review Contractor's understanding of the Contract Documents, cost and pricing data, contractual requirements, and Contractor's capabilities, financial standing, and past experience prior to award.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and all relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Authority Design Project Manager, Architect/Engineer, Contractor and its key personnel nominated for assignment to the Contract, and major subcontractors if so requested by the Contracting Officer. Concerned parties shall each be represented by persons thoroughly familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the work described in the Contract Documents. The Contracting Officer will chair the pre-award meeting.

3. Agenda: Significant discussion items that could affect award include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Provision and acceptability of payment and performance bonds. b. LDBE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation. c. Qualifications of key individuals. d. Quality-control experience. e. Percentage of work performed by own forces. f. Contractor's experience with similar work, including previous Authority contracts. g. Scheduling capabilities of Contractor. h. Financial standing of Contractor. i. Mobilization plan. j. Understanding of work described in the Contract Documents and the physical

constraints associated with work at the Airport. k. Equipment and manpower availability. l. Cost and pricing data.

4. Representations and commitments made by Contractor or its subcontractors shall be construed as binding to the Contract.

B. Pre-construction Conference:

1. General: COTR will schedule pre-construction conference and organizational meeting with Contractor after the Contracting Officer issues a notice of intent to award, or actually awards the Contract. The meeting will review the parties' responsibilities and personnel assignments.



a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Architect/Engineer, and their sub-consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Airport security. b. LBDE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation and certifications. c. Authority-controlled wrap-up insurance program. d. Airport Operations coordination. e. Preliminary construction schedule. f. Phasing. g. Critical work sequencing. h. Designation of key personnel. i. Procedures for processing field decisions and Contract Modifications. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. l. Authority Construction guidelines. m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. Safety procedures. u. Quality-control requirements. v. First aid. w. Progress cleaning. x. Working hours. y. Authority Building Code requirements/permits. z. Coordination with concurrent work of other contracts

4. Refer to Contract Provision "Pre-construction Requirements" for required submittals due at the pre-construction conference.

C. Pre-installation Conferences:

1. General: COTR will conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes.

2. Attendees: Contractor, Installer, and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have proceeded, or will follow.



3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Contract Modifications. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups and sample panels. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's written recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Governing regulations and permits. s. Safety. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Required performance results. v. Recording requirements. w. Protection of construction and personnel. x. Review material selection. y. Fabrication and installation procedures. z. Coordination of involved trades.

4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties.



d. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Weekly Progress Meetings:

1. General: COTR will conduct progress meetings weekly at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. Progress meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as coordination and special pre-installation meetings. Additionally, discussions will address administrative and technical issues of concern, determining resolutions, and development of deadlines for resolution within allowable time frames.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes.

2. Attendees: As may be required by COTR, in addition to representatives of the Authority and Contractor, each subcontractor, supplier, Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Safety and Security. 2) Interface requirements. 3) Time. 4) Sequence of operations. 5) Status of submittals. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Storage Areas 9) Access. 10) Site utilization. 11) Requests for information.



12) Submittals. 13) Noncompliance notices. 14) Temporary facilities and controls. 15) Work hours. 16) Resource allocation. 17) Hazards and risks. 18) Progress cleaning. 19) Quality and work standards. 20) Contract Modifications. 21) Documentation of information for payment requests. 22) Punch list items, as applicable with Project schedule. 23) Utility outages. 24) Changes in pedestriantraffic patterns and in vehiculat traffic patterns. 25) Preparation of Record Documents.

4. Submit at the weekly progress meeting, a two-week look-ahead schedule. This schedule shall include a three-week period, one week showing actual progress from the previous week and two weeks showing planned work for the two weeks after the meeting date. Include in the schedule all activities in sufficient detail as approved by COTR. A two-week look-ahead schedule form will be distributed at the pre-construction conference. Submit a list of subcontractors identifying dates of when subcontractors will be on-site or off-site. A form for this information will be provided by COTR.

5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

F. Schedule Update Meetings:

1. Conduct schedule update meetings before submittal of Contractor's Application for Payment. Determine where each activity is, in relation to Contractor's CPM Schedule. Ensure the incorporation of all changes made to the sequence of work and all change notices issued by the Contracting Officer. Submit the narrative and information specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" if applicable.

2. Attendees: COTR, Contractor's Project manager or superintendent, the Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and the Authority's representative.

3. Submit the updated schedule, as bilaterally agreed on, along with the Application for Payment.

4. Present delay claims for discussion and, when possible, resolution.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for various CPM schedules and reports required for proper performance of the Work.

B. All costs incurred by Contractor to correctly implement and update the schedule shall be borne by Contractor and are part of this Contract.

C. Schedules required include the following:

1. Contract Construction Progress Schedule in CPM format and related narrative and cash flow projection curves.

2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Schedule of Tests and Inspections. 4. Record, As-Built CPM Schedule.

D. Reports required include the following:

1. Daily Construction Reports. 2. Material Location Reports. 3. Field Correction Reports. 4. Special Reports. 5. Monthly Progress Reports. 6. Contractor Quality Control Reports.

E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Application for Payment" for Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Coordination and Meetings" for Project meeting minutes. 3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for test and inspection reports. 4. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for Product List.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: The fundamental unit of work in a Project plan and schedule. Each activity has defined geographical boundaries and a detailed estimate of resources required to construct the task. Each activity is assigned a unique description, activity number, activity codes, and dollar value.



B. CPM Network: The structure of the schedule. The network is the representation that defines the construction logic in terms of all the activities with their logical dependencies.

C. Contract CPM Schedule: A cost- and resource-loaded CPM schedule covering the entire Contract Duration from the Notice to Proceed through Final Acceptance of the Work.

D. Contract Duration/Time: The total time, in calendar days identified in Section III, "Schedule," representing the duration necessary for completion of all physical and administrative requirements under this Contract and any authorized extension thereof.

E. Critical Path: The critical path is the longest connected chain of interdependent activities in a CPM network that impacts the completion of the Project.

F. Excusable Delay: An unforeseeable delay, beyond the control of Contractor, experienced due to no fault or negligence by Contractor, its subcontractors, or suppliers.

G. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

H. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities shall equal the total Contract Price, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

I. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

J. Total Float: The amount of time an activity can be delayed from its earliest start date without delaying the end of Project.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Authority or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

1.4 PLANNING

A. The total Contract Duration and intermediate milestones if applicable, as indicated in Section III, "Schedule," are the Contract requirements.

B. Contractor shall prepare a practical work plan to complete the Work within the Contract Duration, and complete those portions of work relating to each intermediate milestone date and other Contract requirements. Contractor shall generate a computerized cost loaded CPM schedule in Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) format for the Work.

C. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of COTR approval of the Schedule.

D. Failure of Contractor to comply with requirements of this Section may be considered cause for withholding progress payments or termination for default.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Contractor shall provide all schedule submittals on computer disk media as well as tabular printouts, resource curves and histograms, and 24-by-36-inch time-scaled logic diagrams. The latest version of Primavera P3 or SureTrak scheduling software shall be used. All costs incurred by Contractor to correctly implement, computerize and update the CPM Schedule shall be borne by Contractor and are included in the Contract Price. The number of copies of each submittal shall be as described in this Section or as may be requested by COTR.

B. Contract CPM Schedule: The Contract CPM Schedule and its related narrative as described in this Section shall be submitted along with the projected cash-flow curve as early as practicable after the Notice to Proceed, but in no event later than 30 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed. Within 15 calendar days, COTR will respond with approval or direction to change and Contractor shall resubmit within 10 calendar days, if required.

C. Daily Progress Report: Submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon on the day following the date of actual progress.

D. Monthly Progress Report: All components of the Monthly Progress Report described in this Section shall be submitted as attachments to Contractor's monthly Application for Payment.

E. Record As-Built CPM Contract Schedule: A Record Contract Schedule accurately reflecting actual progress of Work shall be submitted, as part of this Contract's Record Documents. All activities shall have actual dates that are true and accurate.

F. Qualification Data: For Project Scheduler.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Project Scheduler Qualifications: Minimum of three years experience and not less than one project of similar size and scope, with capability to produce CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of COTR's request. Project Scheduler shall be classified as one of Contractor's key personnel.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECT SCHEDULER

A. Engage a project scheduler, either as Contractor's employee or as Contractor's consultant, to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling, and to prepare required schedules.

1. Project Scheduler shall be an active participant at all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.



3.2 CONTRACT CPM SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Requirements: The Contract CPM Schedule shall be a computerized cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM Schedule in PDM format that includes the following:

1. The order, sequence, and interdependence of all significant work items including mobilization, demobilization, testing and commissioning, construction, procurement, fabrication, and delivery of critical or special materials and equipment; utility interruption coordination; submittals and approvals of critical Samples, Shop Drawings, procedures, or other reasonable requirements that may be requested by COTR.

2. Work by the Authority, or utility agencies, and other third parties that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.

3. Adequate referencing of all work items to identify subcontractors or other performing parties.

4. Activity Coding may be provided by the COTR to establish minimum requirements for structure and values for the first 5 code fields.

5. Activity durations not in excess of 14 calendar days, except nonconstruction activities such as procurement and fabrication. Activities shall be broken down in the level of detail prescribed by COTR.

6. Activities that are cost loaded to show the direct cost required to perform the Work, including work by subcontractors.

7. A narrative that explains the basis for Contractor's determination of construction logic, estimated durations, cost allocations, estimated quantities and production rates, hours per shift, workdays per week, and types, numbers, and capacities of major construction equipment to be used. A listing of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule shall be provided.

B. Critical Path Activities: The Contract CPM Schedule shall be prepared to include the data for the total Contract and the critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for interim completion dates. Scheduled start or completion dates imposed on the schedule by Contractor shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. Milestone dates shall be the scheduled dates specified in Section III, "Schedule," if applicable, and shall be prominently identified. The Contract CPM Schedule shall accurately show all as-built activities completed from the issuance of the Notice to Proceed up to the submittal of this schedule.

C. Assignment of Costs to Activities for Progress Payments:

1. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the Contract CPM Schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with COTR's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be assigned to testing and commissioning activities, O&M manuals, punchlist activities, and Project Record Documents.

2. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by COTR. 3. The total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Price. 4. Activities shall be cost coded as directed by COTR.

D. Required Submittals: On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit five copies of each of the following components of the Contract CPM Schedule:



1. A time-scaled plot of the schedule network in PDM format showing logic ties for all activities including submittals and procurement activities.

2. Computer-generated CPM Schedule Reports that contain the following data for each work item: activity identification number, description, resource loading, duration, early start and early finish calendar dates, late start and late finish calendar dates, and total float in calendar days. The reports shall also show the logic ties of successor and predecessor work items. The reports shall be sorted as follows, or other sorts as required by COTR:

a. By activity identification. b. By total float x early start. c. By early start x early finish x total float.

3. The narrative described in Subparagraph 3.3-A-7 above. 4. A cash-flow report showing monthly expenditures projected over the life of the Contract.

A cumulative cash-flow curve based on early and late schedule events shall also be submitted. These reports shall be derived from the Contract CPM Schedule.

3.3 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site, coordinate with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," and submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon of the day following day of actual progress:

1. List of subcontractors (by trade group) at the site. 2. List of separate contractors at the site. 3. Approximate count of personnel (by trade group) at the site. 4. Equipment (by trade group) at the site. 5. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 6. Accidents (refer to accident reports). 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 13. Change Notices/Directives and Contract Modifications received, implemented. 14. Services connected, disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions, occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. 18. Material deliveries.

3.4 MATERIAL LOCATION REPORTS

A. At weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at the site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for all materials or items of equipment being fabricated or stored away from the building site. Submit copies of list to COTR at weekly intervals.



3.5 FIELD CORRECTION REPORT

A. When the need to take corrective action that requires a departure from the Contract Documents arises, prepare a detailed report including a statement describing the problem and recommended changes. Indicate reasons the Contract Documents cannot be followed. Submit a copy to COTR immediately.

3.6 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. When an event of unusual or significant nature occurs at the site, prepare and submit a special report. List the chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, an evaluation of the results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise COTR in advance when such events are known or predictable.

1. Include tabular CPM reports, time-scaled logic diagrams, resource curves and histograms, and narratives as requested by COTR.

B. Submit special reports directly to COTR within three calendar days of an occurrence. Submit a copy to other parties affected by the occurrence.

3.7 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTING

A. General: Approval of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment shall be contingent, among other factors, on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update.

B. Monthly Schedule Update Meetings: Monthly schedule updates shall be the product of joint review meetings between Contractor, COTR, and major active subcontractors. The joint review shall focus on actual progress for the preceding month, planned progress for the upcoming month supported by a Contractor-prepared Four-Week Look-Ahead Schedule, impact to schedule if any due to change notices issued, adverse weather, and any effected changes to the Construction CPM Schedule. The agreed on progress, and changes, if any, shall be incorporated into the schedule update to be submitted. The update shall always represent the actual history of accomplishment of all activities, and will form the basis for Contractor's Application for Payment. Contractor's delay claims shall be presented for discussion and, when possible, resolution.

C. Required Submittals: On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit two copies in electronic format of the updated CPM schedule and five copies of each of the following components of the Monthly Progress Report:

1. A monthly progress narrative, the content of which shall be prescribed by COTR, but shall include as a minimum a description of overall progress for the preceding month, a critical path analysis, a discussion of problems encountered and proposed solution thereof, delays experienced and proposed recovery measures, a monthly reconciliation of weather impact, the status and impact of contract modifications, documentation of any logic changes, and any other changes made to the schedule since the previous monthly update.



2. CPM schedule reports listing completed activities, activities in progress, and remaining activities in the format requested by COTR. For each activity, Contractor shall provide those details identified in Subparagraph 3.3-D-2.

3. Monthly and cumulative cash-flow curves that show actual vs. planned cash-flow status. 4. Documentation of delivered material in the form of paid invoices or other evidence that

Contractor has clear title for the material delivered.

D. If critical activities of the schedule are delayed and such delay is not excusable as defined in this Section, the remaining sequence of activities and/or duration thereof shall be adjusted by Contractor through such measures as additional manpower, additional shifts, or the implementation of concurrent operations until the schedule produced indicates Work will be completed on schedule. Except as provided elsewhere in the Contract, all costs incurred by Contractor to recover from inexcusable delays shall be borne by Contractor.

E. The monthly schedule update shall form the basis for Contractor's Application for Payment. The progress payment for an activity shall be based on its agreed on percentage of completion. On unit-priced contracts, the approval of Contractor's monthly requisition is contingent on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update; however, the basis of payment will be the actual measurement of COTR-accepted, in-place units of work.

3.8 DELAYS AND REQUESTS FOR EXTENSION OF TIME

A. The determination for an extension of the Contract Time will be made by the Contracting Officer according to the Contract Provision "Default."

B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that delays in activities, irrespective of the party causing the delay, which according to the computer mathematical analysis do not affect any critical activity or milestone dates on the CPM network at the time of the delay, shall not become the basis for an extension of the Contract Time. The only basis for any extension of time will be the demonstrated impact of an excusable delay on the critical path. In demonstrating such impact, Contractor shall provide adequate detail as required by the Contract, and Contractor shall prove that:

1. An event occurred. 2. Contractor was not responsible for the event in that the event was beyond the control of

Contractor, and was without fault or negligence of Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, and the event was unforeseeable.

3. The event was the type for which an excuse is granted according to the "Default" provision of this Contract.

4. Activities on the critical path of the Work were delayed. 5. The event in fact caused the delay of the Work. 6. The requested additional time is an appropriate and reasonable extension of the Contract

Time, given the actual delay encountered.

C. Time Extensions for Unusually Severe Weather:

1. If unusually severe weather conditions are the basis for a request for an extension of the Contract Time, such request shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably



anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the critical activities of the scheduled construction.

2. The schedule of anticipated adverse weather below will constitute the base line for monthly (or a prorated portion thereof) weather/time evaluation by the Contracting Officer. On issuance of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the Contract on a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days will be recorded by Contractor on a calendar day basis (include weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly-anticipated adverse weather days set forth below.

a. For purposes of this clause, the term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days that can be demonstrated to have been impacted by adverse weather.

b. Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Calendar Days:

1) January - 7. 2) February - 5. 3) March - 6. 4) April - 6. 5) May - 8. 6) June - 6. 7) July - 6. 8) August - 7. 9) September - 5. 10) October - 5. 11) November - 5. 12) December - 6.

c. The number of actual adverse weather days shall be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for time extension based on adverse weather unless the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of anticipated adverse weather days, and unless such adverse weather days prevent work for 50 percent or more of Contractor's workday. In preparing the Contract Schedule, Contractor shall reflect the above anticipated adverse weather days on all weather-dependent activities. Weather-caused delays shall not result in any additional compensation to Contractor.

3. On days where adverse weather is encountered, Contractor shall list all critical activities under progress and shall indicate the impact adverse weather had, if any, on the progress of such activities. This information shall be presented at the end of the adverse weather day to COTR or its authorized representative for its review and approval.

4. If Contractor is found eligible for an extension of the Contract Time, the Contracting Officer will issue a modification extending the time for Contract completion. The extension of time will be made on a calendar day basis.

D. Required Submittals:

1. Provide time-impact analysis that illustrates impact during update period in which event occurred, that event has been mitigated to greatest possible extent, and that event still impacts overall completion of Project.

2. Include with request, two copies of submittal of impacted schedule, in electronic format, and photocopies of all relevant documents that support the claim.



3. Submit all required items within the following time periods:

a. 10 calendar days of event occurrence. b. 10 calendar days of Contractor's knowledge of impact. c. 14 calendar days of written request by COTR.

4. Expiration of time periods without submittal shall constitute forfeiture of rights for these specific impacts.

3.9 RECORD CPM SCHEDULE

A. After all Contract work items are complete, and as a condition of final payment, Contractor shall submit three copies of a Record, As-Built CPM Schedule showing actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. These schedule submittals shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final Completion construction photographs. 4. Demonstration and training videotapes.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for submitting construction photographs. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as

Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 3. Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training” for submitting videotapes of

demonstration of equipment and training of Authority’s personnel.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building including a detailed description of each project area with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include the same label information as the corresponding set of photographs.

C. Construction Photographs: Submit four prints of each photographic view within five days of taking photographs.

1. Format: 8-by-10-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade photographic paper mounted on card stock to allow a 1-inch-wide margin and enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder.

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide a computer generated applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project.



b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of COTR. d. Name of Architect/Engineer. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date photograph was taken. g. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction.

3. Negatives: Submit a complete set of photographic negatives in protective envelopes with each submittal of prints. Identify date photographs were taken.


A. Photographer Qualifications:

1. Photographer: Individual of established reputation who has been regularly engaged as a professional construction photographer for not less than three years.

B. Costs: Include Photographer's services in the Contract Price.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer. Provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lighted photographs without obscuring shadows.

1.6 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to the Authority for unlimited reproduction of photographic and documentation.

1.7 EXTRA PRINTS

A. Extra Prints: If requested by COTR, photographer shall prepare extra prints of photographs. Contractor will not be responsible for the cost of such additional prints.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Photographic Film: Manual Single Lens Reflex camera using 35 mm, 100, 200 or 400 speed, color film. Do not use point and shoot cameras. Use lenses with focal length of either 50 mm or 55 mm.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PHOTOGRAPHS, GENERAL

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to take construction photographs.

B. Date Stamp: Date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph.

C. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of progress photographs in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to COTR.

D. Provide auxiliary lighting as required to produce clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows.

E. Depth of field is to be maximum range and within focus to clearly show Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

F. Clean Work prior to photographing, so that dirt and other foreign matter does not obscure detail.”

3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take color photographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by COTR.

1. Take eight photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to the project before starting the Work.

2. Take eight photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining the project to accurately record the physical conditions at the start of construction.

B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 12 color photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. The COTR will select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken.

C. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 10 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. COTR will direct photographer for desired vantage points.

D. Additional Photographs: COTR may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Contract Modification and are not included in the Contract Price.

1. Photographer will be given three days notice, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, photographer shall take additional photographs within 24 hours

of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,

the following:



a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. COTR's request for special publicity photographs.



SUBMITTALS 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting warranties. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,

Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Divisions 02 through 34 Sections, if included for this project, for specific requirements

for submittals in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires COTR's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require COTR's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals, unless approved by COTR. If approved by the COTR, the Contractor shall submit the CAD Hold Harmless and Indemnification Agreement, included following this Section.

B. Submit all submittals from each given Specification Section at the same time, unless sequenced submittals are specifically required.

C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that requires sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.



a. Without change to the Contract Duration, COTR reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

b. Coordinate each submittal to be complete as required by the specifications. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review

D. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

E. Contractor's Responsibilities: Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and submission of all submittals. Submit to COTR all submittals; the COTR will in turn forward submittals to the appropriate parties for review.

F. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on COTR’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 21 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow

additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. COTR will advise Contractor when a submittal processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow an additional 45 calendar days for submittals related to fire-protection systems.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 15 calendar days for review of each re-submittal.

4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to COTR enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. Processing of incomplete or unacceptable submissions by COTR shall not reduce the number of calendar days specified above for COTR's review. Resubmissions shall be treated the same as initial submissions relative to review time.

5. Notations on submittals that increase the Contract cost or time of completion shall be brought to COTR's attention before proceeding with the Work.

G. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by COTR and Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Contract name and number. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor, if applicable. f. Name and address of supplier, if applicable. g. Name of manufacturer, if applicable. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.



1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a dash and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000-001 or 070150.19-001). Re-submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another dash (e.g., 061000-001-A or 070150.19-001-A).

i. Alphanumeric project Identifier. Identifier is shown on the contract drawings cover sheet.

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Transmittal number.

H. Resubmissions: Re-submittal procedure shall follow the same procedures and same number as the initial submittal with the following exceptions:

1. Transmittal shall contain the same information as the first transmittal and the submission number shall indicate second, third, etc., submission. The drawing number/description shall be identical to the initial submission and the date shall be the revised date for that submission.

2. No new material shall be included on the same transmittal for a resubmission. 3. COTR rejection shall not warrant a claim by Contractor for additional time or cost.

I. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Where significant deviations from the Contract requirements exist, follow the guidelines set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for substitutions.

J. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless COTR observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Additional copies submitted for Operations and Maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned.

K. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to COTR using the approved transmittal form provided by COTR. COTR will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Use transmittal forms and follow other submittal procedures according to information provided to Contractor at the preconstruction meeting.

L. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

1. Bear all costs incurred for such reproduction and distribution. Prints of all reviewed Shop Drawings may be made from transparencies that carry the appropriate review stamps.

M. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “approved” by COTR in connection with construction.



1.5 SUBMITTAL LOG

A. Prepare a log that contains a complete listing of all submittals required by Contract. Submit the log at the preconstruction meeting. Organize the submittal log by Section number. Assign each submittal a sequential number for identification and tracking purposes.

1. Coordinate the submittal log with Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." The submittal log shall be submitted for COTR's review. Include the following information:

a. Title of submittal/description. b. Submittal number (sequential). c. Scheduled date for the first submittal. d. Drawing number, if applicable. e. Applicable Section number. f. Name of subcontractor/vendor. g. Scheduled date of COTR's final release or approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.



5. Number of Copies: Submit six copies, in addition to the number of copies to be returned to Contractor. Provide one additional copy for submittals related to fire-protection system.

6. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

f. Shop work manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit four opaque prints of each submittal. Provide one additional print for items related to fire-protection systems. COTR will return one marked up print for Contractor’s distribution.

a. Each print shall bear Contractor's approval stamp on each sheet.

D. Coordination Drawings:

1. Coordination Drawings, prepared by Contractor, detail the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

2. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.



2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Color name and code designation or description. e. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Authority’s property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. COTR will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. COTR will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

F. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space.



4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. COTR will return two copies.

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

K. Contractor Warranty Letter: Comply with requirements in Contract Provision "Warranty of Construction." Provide the dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service.

L. Special Warranty Letters: Provide dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service for special warranties required in Division 02 through 33 Sections.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. COTR will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. An officer shall sign certificates and certifications or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.



D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.

I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence from a model code organization acceptable to the Authority that product complies with USBC. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results.



7. Limitations of use.

O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but are not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement on whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

S. Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of the coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any and term of coverage.

T. Manufacturers' warranties.

U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."

V. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to COTR.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN



A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to COTR.

1. In checking Shop Drawings and Product Data, verify all dimensions and field conditions and check and coordinate Shop Drawings and Product Data of any Section or trade with the requirements of other sections or trades as related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation of the Work.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents, which shall include dimensions, clearances, compatibility, and coordination with Shop Drawings and Product Data submitted for other work.

C. If Contractor has not checked the submittals carefully, even though stamped as checked and approved, submittals shall be returned to Contractor for proper checking before further processing or review by COTR regardless of any urgency claimed by Contractor. In such a situation, Contractor will be responsible for any resulting delays to the scheduled Contract completion. Furthermore, Contracting Officer may hold Contractor responsible for increased Authority costs resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements set forth herein.

3.2 COTR’S ACTION

A. General: COTR will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.



B. COTR Responsibilities: The review of Shop Drawings and other submittals by COTR will be for general conformance with the Contract only, and the review shall not be interpreted as a checking of detailed dimensions, quantities, or approval of deviations from the Contract Documents. COTR review shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibility for accuracy of Shop Drawings nor for the furnishing and installation of materials or equipment according to the Contract requirements.

1. Approval of Shop Drawings or other submittals is not to be interpreted as approval of a substitute material. Approval of substitutions will be accomplished according to requirements set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Action Submittals: COTR will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. COTR will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Not Reviewed" to be used at Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

1. No Exceptions Taken: Means fabrication/installation may be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to the Contract Price or the Contract Time.

2. Make Corrections as Noted: Same as "Approved," providing Contractor complies with corrections noted on submittal. Resubmission required only if Contractor is unable to comply with noted corrections.

3. Revise and Resubmit: Fabrication and/or installation MAY NOT be undertaken. Make appropriate revisions and resubmit, limiting corrections to items marked.

4. Not Reviewed: If comments note that submittal is not in proper condition for review, fabrication and/or installation may not be undertaken; prepare a new submittal according to requirements and submit without delay.

D. Informational Submittals: COTR will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it, if it does not comply with requirements. COTR will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

E. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section “Submittals” for process required to submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan.

2. Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections.

3. Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination” 4. Division 01 Section “Operation And Maintenance Data” 5. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” 6. Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” for repair and restoration of construction

disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 7. Divisions 02 through 34 Sections, if included for this project, specifically for specific test

and inspection requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor to provide and maintain an effective Quality-Control Program that complies with this Section and with requirements of the "Contract Provisions," Section VII, "Inspection of Construction and Final Inspection and Acceptance."

2. Establish a QC Program that consists of the following:

a. QC Organization b. QC Plan c. QC Plan Meeting d. Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting e. QC meetings f. Phases of Control\ g. Submittal review and approval h. Operation & Maintenance data and Warranty receipt verification prior to product

delivery i. Material verification at delivery j. Testing, completion inspections, and QC certifications and documentation

necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.



3. Contractor is not responsible for Special Inspections according to requirements of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (USBC). The Authority’s agent shall provide these Special Inspection services. Special Inspections coordination should be discussed at weekly progress meetings and scheduled dates for Special Inspections carried on the two-week look ahead. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of and notification to the Authority for the following Special Inspections. a. Special inspections, as required by IBC Section 1704.3, include, but are not

necessarily limited to, the following: 1) Steel construction.

4. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that require those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

5. Schedule of Values: Contractor shall include all test and inspection activities in its CPM

and establish a Schedule of Values for all quality test and inspection activities; and all required reports, and procedures required in the Contract on a Section-by-Section basis. Additionally, Contractor shall include a pay line item specifically for CQC activities and QCM position(s) required by the General Conditions. CQC activities shall be reported per Division 01 Section "Applications for Payment."

6. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements

specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of its responsibilities for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

7. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control

procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

8. The provisions of this Section shall not limit requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by the Authority or other agencies having jurisdiction.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

a. ASTM C 1077 Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation latest edition.

b. ASTM D 3666 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials latest edition.

c. ASTM D 3740 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction latest edition.

d. ASTM E 329 Agencies engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction latest edition. ASTM E 543 Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing latest edition.



e. ASTM E 543 Agencies performing Nondestructive Testing latest edition.

2. METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORT AUTHORITY

a. Construction Safety Manual, most current edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality: Conformance to the requirements established by the contract specifications and drawings.

B. Control: To guide and have influence over.

C. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The construction contractor’s system to manage, control, and document their own, their supplier’s, and their subcontractor’s activities to comply with the contract requirements.

D. Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR). Primary on-site representative of the Contracting Officer for technical matters. Duties and responsibilities of the COTR will be transmitted to the contractor via letter from the Contracting Officer.

E. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed by the Authority before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirement. Additionally, the Authority fulfills its responsibility to be certain that the CQC is functioning and the specified end product is achieved.

F. Mockups:

1. Full-size, physical example assemblies that are constructed on site to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects or details and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work shall be judged. Mockups supersede samples in the approval and acceptance of the Work. Unless otherwise indicated, construct mockups away from the work. Unless otherwise indicated, do not use mockups as part of the work.

2. Do not use rejected mockups as permanent construction. Rebuild and replace rejected mockups with acceptable mockups, at no cost to the Authority.

G. Definable Feature of Work: A definable feature of work (DFOW) is a task, which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has the same control requirements and work crews.

H. Experienced: When used with an entity, “experienced” means having successfully completed a minimum of 10 projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Specific experience requirements enumerated in these specifications supersede this requirement.



1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the COTR for a decision before proceeding. This paragraph refers to industry and government standards. In case of a difference between drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall govern.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 Section, "Submittals."

1. Action Submittals.

a. Quality Control (QC) Plan.

B. NOTE: Coordinate the submittal requirement dates with the submittal dates in Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation”.

C. Submit a QC plan within 20 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. The QC Plan shall include a preliminary submittal of the list of definable features of work that shall cover the first 90 calendar days of construction.

1. Submit at this time résumés of key personnel to be assigned to this contract and the limits of their authority. Show how this project management structure fits into the Contractor’s corporate management structure.

D. Any approval by the COTR of the QC Plan shall be treated as “accepted, predicated upon successful implementation.” Stop work if the QC Plan becomes disapproved. The exception is the work authorized in the paragraph entitled "Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval," shall stop.

1.7 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

A. Provide a sample copy set of report forms to the Contracting Officer during the Pre-Construction Conference. The report forms shall consist of the Quality Control Daily Report, Preparatory Phase Report, Initial Phase Report, and Project Quality Control Monthly Summary. These forms may be edited to support the project. Other reports referenced below may be in formats customarily used by the Contractor, Testing Laboratories, etc. and shall contain the information required by this specification.

B. Deliver the following listed items to the COTR at the times specified:

1. Quality Control Daily Report: Original and 2 copies, by 12:00 noon the next working day after each day that work is performed.

2. Superintendent’s Daily Report: Original and 2, by 12:00 noon the next working day after each day that work is performed, attached to the Quality Control Daily Report.

3. Material Receiving Inspection Report: Original and 2 copies, by 12:00 noon the next working day after each day that work is performed, attached to the Quality Control Daily Report.



4. Preparatory Phase Report: Original attached to the original Quality Control Daily Report and 1 copy attached to each copy of the Quality Control Daily Report.

5. Initial Phase Report: Original attached to the original Quality Control Daily Report and 1 copy attached to each copy of the Quality Control Daily Report.

6. QC specialist Reports: Originals and 2 copies, by 12:00 noon the next working day after each day that work is performed, attached to the Quality Control Daily Report.

7. Field Test Reports: 2 copies, within 2 working days after the test is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

8. Monthly Summary Report of Tests: 2 copies, do not attach to a Quality Control Daily Report.

9. Project Quality Control Monthly Summary Report: 2 copies, do not attach to a Quality Control Daily Report.

10. Inspection Log and Signoff Sheets: one copy, submitted daily within 1 day of the inspection.

11. Testing Plan and Log: 2 copies, submitted within 2 working days of the end of the month.

12. Deficiency List: 2 copies, submitted to the COTR weekly. 13. Monthly Deficiency Report: 2 copies within two working days of the end of the month. 14. QC Meeting Minutes: 2 copies, within 2 working days after the meeting. 15. QC Certifications: As required by paragraph entitled "QC Certifications."

1.8 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish and maintain a QC Program as described in this Section. The QC Program consists of but is not limited to the following:

1. QC Organization. 2. QC Plan. 3. QC Plan Meeting. 4. Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting 5. QC meetings. 6. Phases of Control. 7. Submittal review and approval. 8. Operations and Maintenance data. 9. Warranty receipt verification prior to product delivery. 10. Material verification at delivery. 11. Testing. 12. Completion inspections. 13. QC certifications and documentation necessary to provide materials, equipment,

workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.

14. The QC Program shall cover on-site and off-site work and shall be keyed to the work sequence.

15. No work or testing may be performed unless the QCM or a pre-approved alternate is on the work site.

16. The QCM shall report to an officer of the firm and shall not be subordinate to the Project Superintendent or the Project Manager.

17. Quality Control Manager is the primary individual responsible for quality control. The QCM, Project Superintendent and Project Manager shall be responsible for the quality of



work on the job. Project Superintendent shall be held responsible for the quality of production.

B. Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval: The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the approval of the QC Plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers, temporary utilities, and surveying.

C. Approval: Approval of the QC Plan is required prior to the start of any construction. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC Plan and operations as necessary, including but not limited to removal of personnel, to ensure the specified quality of work. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify the submitted qualifications. All QC organization personnel shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may require the removal of any individual for non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the contract.

D. Notification of Changes: Notify the COTR, in writing, of any proposed change, including changes in the QC organization personnel, a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed change. Proposed changes shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

1.9 QC ORGANIZATION

A. Staffing Levels: Provide sufficient qualified quality-control personnel to monitor each work activity at all times. Scheduling and coordinating of all inspections and testing shall match the type and pace of work activity.

1. In cases where multiple trades, disciplines, or subcontractors are on site at same time, each activity shall be tested and inspected by personnel skilled in that portion of the work.

2. In cases where multiple shifts are employed, the quality-control staff shall be increased as required to monitor the work on each shift.

B. The following positions are key personnel as defined by the Authority in this and other Division 01 Specification Sections.

1. Project Manager: To enhance the effectiveness of the Quality Control Organization Project Manager shall be intimately involved in Quality Control. To this end, the Project manager shall have successfully completed the Army Corps of Engineers/NAVFAC Contractor Quality Control Course (details in Paragraph “Construction Quality Management Training” below).

2. Project Superintendent a. Qualifications: Fifteen years of experience, with five years experience in a

supervisory role coordinating various trades at multiple work areas.

C. Quality Control Manager (QCM):

1. Duties: Provide a QCM at the work site to implement and manage the QC Program. In addition to implementing and managing the QC Program, the QCM may perform the duties of project superintendent. The QCM is required to attend the QC Plan Meeting, attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, conduct the QC meetings,



perform the Phases Control perform submittal review and approval, ensure testing is performed and provide QC certifications and documentation required in this contract. The QCM is responsible for managing and coordinating the Phases Control and documentation performed by Testing Laboratory personnel and any other inspection and testing personnel required by this Contract.

2. Qualifications: An individual with a minimum of 5 years experience as a superintendent, inspector, QCM, project manager, project engineer or construction manager on similar size and type construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this Contract. The individual shall be familiar with the requirements of the Construction Safety Manual, and have experience in the areas of hazard identification and safety compliance. The QCM shall be interviewed and approved by COTR.

3. Construction Quality Management Training: In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the QCM shall have completed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management for Contractors." If the QCM does not have a current certification, they shall obtain the CQM course certification within 60 - calendar days of award. This short course is periodically offered in alternate months by: (1) the Maryland Chapter, Associated General Contractors (AGC), 410-321-7870; [email protected] and by (2) the Virginia Chapter, Associated Builders and Contractors (ABC), 703-968-6205, [email protected]; [email protected]. The training uses Army Corps of Engineers course content. The course is facilitated by instructors from Army Corps of Engineers, North Atlantic Division, Baltimore District, and by instructors from the Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Engineering Field Activity Chesapeake.

D. Alternate QCM Duties and Qualifications: Designate an alternate for the QCM at the work site to serve in the event of the designated QCM's absence. The period of absence may not exceed two weeks at one time, and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year. The qualification requirements for the Alternate QCM shall be the same as for the QCM.

E. QC Specialists Duties and Qualifications

1. Provide a separate QC specialist at the work site for each of the areas of responsibilities, specified below, who shall assist and report to the QCM and who shall have no duties other than the assigned quality control duties. QC specialists are required to attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, QC meetings, and be physically present at the construction site to perform the Phases Control and prepare documentation for each definable feature of work in their area of responsibility at the frequency specified below.

Qualification/Experience in Area of Responsibility

Area of Responsibility [Frequency]

Registered Electrical Engi-neer with 5 years construction experience

Electrical systems Weekly during installation and 100% during all testing and com-missioning

Registered Structural Engi-neer with 5 years structural steel erection experience

Structural steel erection and installation

Daily during steel erection

Registered Mechanical Engi-neer with 5 years years con-struction experience with HVAC systems

Mechanical Systems Weekly during installation and 100% during all testing and com-missioning



F. Submittal Reviewer (s) Duties and Qualifications

1. A registered architect or professional engineer shall review each submittal. 2. Each of the following submittals shall be reviewed by individual(s) meeting the

qualifications/experience specified below:

Qualification/Experience in Submittal Discipline

Submittals to be reviewed and Specification Number

Submittal

Registered Electrical Engineer Electrical Systems Sub-mittals

Division 26 and 28

Registered Structural Engineer Structural steel 051200 Registered Mechanical Engineer Mechanical and Plumbing

Systems Division 22 and 23

G. Project Scheduler: Qualifications: Refer to Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation”.

1.10 QC PLAN MEETING

A. Within 10 calendar days of notice of award and prior to submission of the QC plan, meet with the COTR to discuss the QC plan requirements of this Contract. The purpose of this meeting is to communicate expectations and facilitate understanding of the QC plan requirements prior to plan development and submission.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) PLAN

A. Provide, for approval by the COTR, a QC plan submitted in a 3-ring binder with pages numbered sequentially that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes but may not necessarily be limited to the following:

B. A table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs in the following order:

1. QC ORGANIZATION 2. PERSONNEL MATRIX 3. NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS 4. DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONNEL 5. APPOINTMENT LETTERS 6. OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS INCLUDING BOCA INSPECTION COMPANIES 7. TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION AND CERTIFICATIONS 8. TESTING PLAN AND LOG 9. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER 10. LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES 11. PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE PHASES OF CONTROL 12. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 13. DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES 14. PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS 15. PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION 16. FORMS



17. ATTACHMENTS

C. A chart showing the QC organizational structure.

D. A personnel matrix showing for each Section of the specification who shall review and approve submittals, who shall perform and document the Phases Control, and who shall perform and document the testing.

E. Names and qualifications, in résumé format, for each person in the QC organization. Include the CQM course certifications for the QCM and Alternate QCM as required by the paragraphs entitled "Construction Quality Management Training" and "Alternate QCM Duties and Qualifications".

F. Duties, responsibilities and authority of each person in the QC organization.

G. Letters signed by an officer of the firm appointing the QCM and Alternate QCM and stating that they are responsible for implementing and managing the QC Program as described in this contract. Include in this letter the responsibility of the QCM and Alternate QCM to implement and manage the three phases of quality control, and their authority to stop work that is not in compliance with the contract. The QCM shall issue letters of direction to QC specialists outlining their duties, authorities, and responsibilities. Copies of the letters shall be included in the QC plan.

H. A listing of outside organizations such as, architectural and consulting engineering firms that will be employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will provide.

I. Testing laboratory information required by the paragraphs entitled "Accreditation Requirements" or "Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements", as applicable.

J. A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests required, referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test, the frequency, the desired results and the person responsible for each test and shall be identified as a scheduled (CPM) activity.

K. Procedures for reviewing, approving and managing submittals. Provide the name(s) of the person(s) in the QC organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval. Provide the initial submittal of the Submittal Register as specified in Section entitled "Submittals."

L. List of definable features of work. The list shall be cross-referenced to the contractor's Construction Schedule and the specification sections. For projects requiring a Progress Chart, the list of definable features of work shall include but not be limited to all items of work on the schedule. For projects requiring a Network Analysis Schedule, the list of definable features of work shall include but not be limited to all critical path activities. Include a chart of common deficiencies for the Definable Feature of work. Detail the control procedures that shall be employed to eliminate this common deficiency.

M. Procedures for Performing the Phases of Control. The contractor shall develop a plan for incorporating each of the control phases into the work. The plan shall detail who shall be responsible for scheduling the phases, conducting the phase as well as documenting the phase. The use of project specific forms may be helpful. However, the entire plans and specifications establish the quality and not just the checklists. The Preparatory and Initial Phases and meetings



shall be conducted with a view towards obtaining quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature of work.

N. Include all activities for which this specification requires QC specialists or Specialty Inspection Personnel, and for any specific definable features of work as identified in the QC Plan.

O. Documentation procedures, including proposed report formats.

P. Procedures to identify, record, track and complete rework items.

Q. Procedures for Identifying and Documenting the Completion Inspection process. Include in these procedures the responsible party for punch out inspection, pre-final inspection, and final acceptance inspection.

R. A complete set of report forms to be utilized on this project.

S. All applicable subcontractors and suppliers Quality Control Plans complete with Contactor’s CQC planned involvement.

1.12 COORDINATION AND MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING MEETING

A. After submission of the QC Plan, and prior to the start of any physical construction, meet with the COTR to present the QC Program required by this Contract. The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC details, including documentation, administration for on-site and off-site work, and the coordination of the Contractor's management, production and QC personnel. At the meeting, the Contractor shall be required to explain in detail how Phases Control shall be implemented for each definable feature of work. As a minimum, the Contractor's personnel required to attend shall include an officer of the firm, the project manager, project superintendent, QCM, Alternate QCM, QC Specialists and subcontractor representatives. Each subcontractor who shall be assigned QC responsibilities shall have a principal of the firm at the meeting. Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the QCM and signed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the signed minutes to all attendees.

1.13 QC MEETINGS

A. After the start of construction, the QCM shall conduct QC meetings once every two weeks at the work site with the project superintendent. The QCM shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the COTR within 2 working days after the meeting. The COTR may attend these meetings. The QCM shall notify the COTR at least 48 hours in advance of each meeting. These meetings shall be scheduled to precede or follow the regular weekly progress meeting. As a minimum, the following shall be accomplished at each meeting:

1. Review the minutes of the previous meeting 2. Review the schedule and the status of work:

a. Work or testing accomplished since last meeting b. Rework items identified since last meeting c. Rework items completed since last meeting;



3. Review the status of submittals, O & M data and Warranty Manuals:

a. Submittals, O & M data and Warranties reviewed and approved since last meeting b. Submittals, O & M data and Warranties required in the near future;

4. Review the work to be accomplished in the next 2 week(s) and documentation required:

a. Establish completion dates for rework items b. Update the schedule showing planned and actual dates of the preparatory, initial

and follow-up phases, including testing and any other inspection required by this contract

c. Discuss construction methods and the approach that shall be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature of work

d. Discuss status of off-site work or testing e. Documentation required; f. Discuss upcoming Activity Hazard Analyses.

5. Resolve QC and production problems, assist in resolving Request for Information issues; 6. Address items that may require revising the QC plan:

a. Changes in QC organization personnel b. Changes in procedures.

7. Review health and safety plan

1.14 PHASES OF CONTROL

A. The Phases of Control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work and shall include the following for each definable feature of work.

B. Material Receiving Inspection: Contractor shall establish a formal material receiving inspection program to verify material compliance to approved Shop Drawings, approved submittals, and the contract plans and specifications.

C. Preparatory Phase: Notify the COTR at least 2 workdays in advance of each preparatory phase. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the QCM and attended by the superintendent, and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions in the daily Quality Control Daily Report and in the Preparatory Phase Report. As a minimum the following should be covered prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work:

1. Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections. 2. Review the Contract drawings. 3. Verify that appropriate shop drawings, O & M data, Warranties, and submittals for

materials and equipment have been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of approved factory test results, when required.

4. Establish control to be utilized to assure work complies with the contract plans and specifications.

5. Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to provide the required QC testing.



6. Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has been completed. 7. Examine the required materials, equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on

hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data. 8. Discuss construction methods, construction tolerances, workmanship standards, and the

approach that shall be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature of work.

9. Review the safety plan and appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met, and that required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted.

D. Initial Phase: Notify the COTR at least 2 workdays in advance of each initial phase. When construction crews are ready to start work on a definable feature of work, conduct the initial phase with the superintendent, and the foreman responsible for that definable feature of work. Observe the initial segment of the definable feature of work to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements. Document the results of the initial phase in the daily Quality Control Daily Report and in the Initial Phase Report. Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work on-site, or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met. As a minimum the following should be covered for each definable feature of work:

1. Ensure controls established during Preparatory Phase are adequate to allow work to proceed in compliance with the plans and specifications.

2. Establish the quality of workmanship required. 3. Resolve conflicts. 4. Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory. 5. Check work procedures for compliance with the Safety Plan and the appropriate activity

hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met.

E. Follow-Up Phase: Perform the following for on-going work daily, or more frequently as necessary until the completion of each definable feature of work and document in the daily Quality Control Daily Report:

1. Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements. 2. Maintain the quality of workmanship required. 3. Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory. 4. Ensure that rework items are being corrected. 5. Perform safety inspections.

F. Code-Required Inspections:

1. Comply with current edition approved by the Commonwealth of Virginia of the USBC, "Special Inspections” or other agencies having jurisdiction. Special Inspections are to be performed by the Authority’s agent. Perform and document all tests, inspections, notifications to the Authority, coordination with the Authority’s agent and other activities listed in the USBC or other agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Notice to COTR: Notify COTR, in writing, at least 48 hours in advance of all code-required inspections. COTR should be apprised in advance of every preparatory and initial inspection. All preparatory, initial, and follow-up inspections shall be made a matter of record in Contractor's quality-control documentation.

G. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases: Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases shall be conducted on the same definable features of work if the quality of on-going work is



unacceptable, if there are changes in the applicable QC organization, if there are changes in the on-site production supervision or work crew, if work on a definable feature is resumed after substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop as directed by the COTR in writing.

H. Notification of Phases of Control for Off-Site Work: On determination by COTR that an item shall require surveillance by the Authority at the point of production, manufacture, or shipment, Contractor shall be notified, in writing, of such determination. Contractor shall furnish to COTR three copies of all purchase orders or subcontracts, for all tiers of subcontractors or suppliers for each item. In addition, copies of documented quality-control operations, tests, and inspections shall be made available to the Authority's representative at the point of production, manufacture, or shipment. The CQC shall notify the COTR at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and initial phases.

1.15 SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL

A. Procedures for submission, review and approval of submittals are described in Division 01 Section “Submittals”.

1.16 TESTING REVIEW W/AUTHORITY

A. Except as stated otherwise in the technical specification sections, perform sampling and testing required under this Contract.

B. Independent Testing Laboratory: When tests are required by civil, electrical, USBC and other codes in effect, a corporately and financially independent testing organization that can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment, or systems evaluated by the testing organization shall be contracted by the Contractor to perform the contractually required tests. The various types of independent laboratories and their requirements are listed below:

C. Accreditation Requirements: Construction materials testing laboratories performing work for Authority construction contracts shall be accredited by one of the laboratory accreditation authorities. The laboratory's scope of accreditation shall include the ASTM standards listed in the paragraph titled "Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements" as appropriate to the testing field. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the "Corporate Office".

D. Electrical testing of components, equipment and systems: The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and systems. The testing firm shall have at least five years experience in the testing of electrical equipment of the type, rating, and voltage used on this Project. The testing laboratories shall be a current full-member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (http://www.neta.org/). This independent testing firm shall perform duties as required under the terms of this Contract.

E. Structural and Pipe Welding: An independent testing firm shall perform all structural and pipe welding examinations as required by this Contract. The inspectors employed by the firm shall hold current certification as an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) for visual weld examinations and ASNT-TC-1A Certification for nondestructive examination of welds. ASNT-TC-1A certifications shall be by an ASNT-TC-1A ACCP Level III.



F. Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements: Provide an independent construction material testing laboratory accredited by an acceptable laboratory accreditation authority to perform sampling and tests required by this Contract. Testing laboratories that have obtained accreditation by an acceptable laboratory accreditation authority listed in the paragraph entitled "Laboratory Accreditation Authorities" submit with the Quality Control Plan, a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The scope of the laboratory's accreditation shall include the test methods required by the Contract. On-site testing facilities shall submit a certified statement by the Supervising Professional Engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, as meeting the requirements of the following minimum ASTM standards listed below as appropriate to the testing field.

1. Laboratories engaged in testing of construction materials shall meet the requirements of

ASTM E 329. 2. Laboratories engaged in testing of concrete and concrete aggregates shall meet the

requirements of ASTM C 1077. 3. Laboratories engaged in testing of bituminous paving materials shall meet the

requirements of ASTM D 3666. 4. Laboratories engaged in testing of soil and rock, as used in engineering design and

construction, shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3740. 5. Laboratories engaged in nondestructive testing (NDT) shall meet the requirements of

ASTM E 543. 6. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of

OSHA and EPA.

G. Laboratory Accreditation Authorities: Laboratory Accreditation Authorities are the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) program, ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICBO ES), and the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) program and the Washington Area Council of Engineering Laboratories (WACEL). Furnish to the COTR, a copy of the current Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The scope of the laboratory's accreditation shall include the test methods required by the Contract.

H. Capability Check: The COTR retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technician's testing procedures, techniques, and other items pertinent to testing, for compliance with the standards set forth in this Contract.

I. Capability Recheck: If non-conformities are discovered during the capability check or any succeeding recheck, Contractor shall be assessed a charge of $750.00 to reimburse the Authority for each recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently selected laboratory. These charges shall be deducted from the total amount due Contractor.

J. Test Results: Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures used. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. If the item fails to conform, notify COTR immediately. Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the specification requirements, whichever is applicable. A testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports shall sign test results. Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other documentation to the COTR via the QCM. Furnish a summary report of field tests at the end of each month. Attach a copy of the summary report to the last daily Quality Control Daily Report of each month.



K. Test Reports and Monthly Summary Report of Tests:

1. The QCM shall furnish the signed reports, certifications, and a summary report of field tests at the end of each month to the COTR. Attach a copy of the summary report to the last daily Quality Control Daily Report of each month.

L. Control and Verification Tests: Control tests are those tests made for Contractor under the Quality Control Plan to assist Contractor in maintaining control of his operations. As described above, Contractor shall procure the services of an independent commercial laboratory to perform the required control tests. The Specifications contain the minimum of the following:

1. Testing criteria 2. Frequency of testing 3. Procedures 4. Methods of construction 5. Number of control tests to be made for each phase of the Work. 6. Notify COTR a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the time samples shall be taken by

Contractor for quality control testing. COTR shall then notify its own testing laboratory contractor so that verification test samples may be taken.

M. Check Tests: Contractor shall furnish to COTR the quantities of materials to be used for check testing as required in the Specifications. Check testing shall be performed by the Authority at an independent laboratory at no cost to Contractor. No direct payment shall be made to Contractor for the furnishing of materials used for check testing.

N. Staffing: All laboratorys' personnel shall work under the supervision of a Professional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

1.17 QC CERTIFICATIONS

A. Quality Control Daily Report Certification

1. Each Quality Control Daily Report shall contain the following statement:

a. “On behalf of (Name of Contractor), I certify that this report and the Inspector's Daily Reports are complete and correct, and that all materials and equipment used, as well as work performed during this reporting period are in compliance with Drawings, Specifications, and Contract provisions, except as noted in this report or attached reports.”

B. Application for Payment Certification: Refer to Division 01 Section "Application for Payment" for address to which the Applications shall be sent.

C. Completion Certification:

1. Upon completion of work under this Contract, the QCM shall furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that "the work has been completed, inspected, tested and is in compliance with the Contract."



1.18 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS

A. Punch-Out Inspection: Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time stated in the Contract Clause entitled "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the specifications, the QCM shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a "punch list" of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications. Include in the punch list any remaining items on the "Rework Items List" which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out Inspection. The punch list shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. A copy of the punch list shall be provided to the COTR. The QCM or staff shall make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished the Contractor shall notify the COTR that the facility is ready for the Authority "Pre-Final Inspection."

B. Pre-Final Inspection: The Authority will perform this inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. An Authority "Pre-Final Punch List" may be developed as a result of this inspection. The QCM shall ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to notifying the Authority that a "Final" inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be corrected in timely manner and shall be accomplished before the contract completion date for the work or any particular increment thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

C. Final Acceptance Inspection: The QCM, the QC specialists, the superintendent or other primary contractor management personnel shall be in attendance at this inspection. The COTR will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional Authority personnel may be in attendance. The Contracting Officer based upon results of the “Pre-Final” inspection will formally schedule the final acceptance inspection. Notice shall be given to the COTR at least 14 calendar days prior to the final inspection stating that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor, as being unacceptable, along with all the remaining work performed under the contract, shall be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection shall be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Authority's additional inspection cost in accordance with the clause in the Contract Provisions entitled "Inspection of Construction." When the Contracting Officer takes possession of partially completed work, it shall be in accordance with clause in the Contract Provisions entitled "Use and Possession Prior to Completion".

1.19 DOCUMENTATION

A. Contractor shall maintain current quality control records, on approved forms, of all control activities, production, tests and inspections performed. These records shall include factual evidence that required tests or inspections have been performed, including type and number of tests or inspections involved; results of tests or inspections; nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.; proposed remedial action; and corrective actions taken. These records shall cover both conforming and defective or deficient features (non-conforming) and shall include a statement that all supplies and materials incorporated into the Work are in full compliance with terms of the Contract. Legible copies of these records shall be furnished to COTR daily. The records shall cover all work placed subsequent to the previously furnished records and shall be verified by Contractor's QCM. Contractor shall document tests and inspections as specified in the technical provisions of the Specifications, and these records shall be available for review by COTR throughout the life of the Contract.



B. Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC Program operations and activities. Establish and maintain the following in a series of 3 ring binders. Binders shall be divided and tabbed as shown below. These binders shall be readily available to the Authority's Quality Assurance Team during normal business hours.

1. All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Reports, arranged by specification Section. 2. All milestone inspections, arranged by Activity/Event Number. 3. A current up-to-date copy of the Testing Plan and Log with supporting field test reports,

arranged by specification section. 4. Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical order. Also include

documentation that modified work was accomplished. 5. A current, up-to-date copy, of the Deficiency List.

C. Report Forms - The contractor shall design all forms to be used in the Quality Control Program. A copy of all forms shall be included with the Quality Control Plan. The forms shall be designed to assist in the control of the quality. The following minimum requirements are listed for specific reports:

1. Quality Control Daily Report: Reports are required for each day that work is performed and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no work and on the last day of a no-work period. Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract. The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Quality Control Daily Reports are to be prepared, signed and dated by the QCM and shall contain the following information:

a. Date of report, report number, Contract Number, and Contract Title. b. Identify Schedule Activity No., Submittal # and list equipment/material received

each day that is incorporated into the job. c. Indicate if Preparatory Phase work was performed today (Yes/No checkboxes). d. If Preparatory Phase work was performed today (including on-site and off-site

work), identify its Schedule Activity Number and Definable Feature of Work. The Index number is a cross reference to the Preparatory Phase Checklist. An example of the Index number is: 0025-P01, where "0025" is the Quality Control Daily Report Number, "P" indicates Preparatory Phase, and "01" is the Preparatory Phase Checklist number(s) for this date. Each entry in this Section shall be accompanied with a corresponding Preparatory Phase Checklist.

e. Indicate if Initial Phase work was performed today (Yes/No checkboxes). f. If Initial Phase work was performed today (including on-site and off-site work),

identify its Schedule Activity Number and Definable Feature of Work. The Index Number is a cross reference to the Initial Phase Checklist. An example of the Index Number is: 0025-I01, where "0025" is the Quality Control Daily Report Number, "I" indicates Initial Phase, and "01" is the Initial Phase Checklist number(s) for this date. Each entry in this Section shall be accompanied with a corresponding Initial Phase Checklist.

g. Results of the Follow-up Phase inspections held today (including on-site and off-site work), including Schedule Activity Number, location of definable feature of work, Specification Sections, etc. Indicate in the report for this definable feature of work that the work complies with the Contract as approved in the Initial Phase, work complies with safety requirements, and that required testing has been performed. Include a list of who performed the tests.



h. List the rework items identified, but not corrected by close of business, along with its associated Schedule Activity Number.

i. List the rework items corrected from the rework items list along with the corrective action taken and its associated Schedule Activity Number.

j. Include a "remarks" section in this report that shall contain pertinent information including but not limited to:

1) Directions received. 2) Quality control problem areas. 3) Deviations from the QC plan. 4) Construction deficiencies encountered. 5) QC meetings held. 6) Acknowledgement that record drawings, specifications, O & M data, and

Warranty Manuals, have been updated. 7) Corrective direction given by the QC Organization and corrective action

taken by the Contractor. 8) For each remark given, identify the Schedule Activity Number that is

associated with the remark.

k. Quality Control Daily Report certification, signature and date.

2. Preparatory Phase Report: Each Definable Feature of Work that is in the Preparatory Phase shall have this report filled out for it. The report shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Attach this report to the Quality Control Daily Report of the same date.

a. Specification Section, date of report, and Contract number shall be filled out. Duplicate this information in the header of the second page of the report.

b. Definable Feature of Work, Schedule Activity Number and Index Number entry and format shall match entry in the Preparatory Phase section of the Quality Control Daily Report. Duplicate this information in the header of the second page of the report.

c. Personnel Present: Indicate the number of hours of advance notice that was given to the COTR and indicate (Yes/No checkboxes) whether or not the COTR was notified. Indicate the Names of Preparatory Phase Meeting attendees, their position and their company affiliation.

d. Submittals: Indicate if submittals have been approved (Yes/No checkboxes), if no indicate what has not been submitted. Are materials on hand (Yes/No checkboxes) and if not, what items are missing. Check delivered material/equipment against approved submittals and comment as required.

e. Material Storage: Indicate if materials/equipment is stored properly (Yes/No checkboxes) and if not, what action is/was taken.

f. Specifications: Review and comment on Specification Paragraphs that describe the material/equipment, procedure for accomplishing the work and clarify any differences.

g. Preliminary Work & Permits: Ensure preliminary work is in accordance with the contract documents and necessary permits are on file, if not, describe the action taken.

h. Testing: Identify who performs tests, the frequency, and where tests are to occur. Review the testing plan, report abnormalities, and if the test facilities have been approved.



i. Discuss Control Procedures that shall be employed to consistently obtain the required specified quality.

j. Safety: Indicate if the activity hazard analysis has been approved (Yes/No checkboxes) and comment on the review of the applicable portions of the Construction Safety Manual.

k. Meeting Comments: Note comments and remarks during the Preparatory Phase Meeting that was not addressed in previous sections of this checklist.

l. Other Items or Remarks: Note any other remarks or items that were a result of the Preparatory Phase.

m. QCM shall sign and date the report.

3. Initial Phase Report: Complete this report for each Definable Feature of Work that is in the Initial Phase. The report shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Attach this report to the Quality Control Daily Report of the same date.

a. Specification Section, date of report, and Contract number shall be entered. b. Definable Feature of Work, Schedule Activity Number and Index Number entry

and format shall match entry in the Initial Phase section of the Quality Control Daily Report.

c. Personnel Present: Indicate the number of hours of advance notice that was given to the COTR and indicate (Yes/No checkboxes) whether or not the COTR was notified. Indicate the Names of Initial Phase Meeting attendees, their position and company/Authority they are with.

d. Control Procedures: Comment on control procedures identified at Preparatory Phase of Control and assurance that work is in accordance with plans, specifications and submittals. Control procedures not producing the required compliance shall be adjusted until the procedures consistently obtain the required quality.

e. Preliminary Work: Ensure preliminary work being placed is in compliance and if not, what action is/was taken.

f. Workmanship: Identify where initial work is located; if a sample panel is required (Yes/No checkboxes); is the initial work the sample (Yes/No checkboxes); and if Yes, describe the panel location and precautions taken to preserve the sample.

g. Resolution: Comment on any differences and the resolutions reached. h. Check Safety: Comment on the safety review of the job conditions. i. Other: Note any other remarks or items that were a result of the Initial Phase. j. QCM shall sign and date the report.

D. Reports from the QC Specialist(s): Reports are required for each day that work is performed in their area of responsibility. QC specialist reports shall include the same documentation requirements as the Quality Control Daily Report for their area of responsibility. QC specialist reports are to be prepared, signed and dated by the QC specialists and shall be attached to the Quality Control Daily Report prepared for the same day.

E. Testing Log: As tests are performed, the QCM shall record on the "Testing Log" the date the test was conducted, the date the test results were forwarded to the COTR, remarks and acknowledgement that an accredited or Contracting Officer approved testing laboratory was used. Forward a copy of the updated "Testing Plan and Log" on the last day of each month. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.



F. Deficiency Log: The QCM shall maintain a list of work that does not comply with the Contract, identifying what items need to be reworked, the date the item was originally discovered, the date the item shall be corrected by, and the date the item was corrected. There is no requirement to report a rework item that is corrected the same day it is discovered. Provide a copy of the deficiency log to the COTR at the weekly progress meeting. The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items needing rework including those identified by the COTR.

G. Special Inspection Control Log: Contractor shall maintain a Special Inspection Control Log chronologically recording each Special test and inspection performed under the USBC, or other agencies having jurisdiction on-site, including the nature of the test or inspection, the date performed, the results, causes for rejection, corrective action taken, and dates of subsequent tests and final acceptance.

H. Test Reports: Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system that shall record all tests results. Information on test designation, location, date of test, specification requirements, results and retest results, causes for rejection and recommended remedial actions shall be documented. A copy of the test results shall be sent directly from the Agency performing the testing services to COTR. A copy of any failing report shall be sent immediately. All test reports shall be reviewed and signed by a professional engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

I. Signoff Sheets: Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system of signoff sheets certifying that all work required before the construction or startup of critical work elements has been constructed and installed according to the plans and specifications.

J. Monthly Deficiency Report: Contractor shall submit a monthly deficiency report to COTR identifying all substandard tests and inspections taken during the month including the nature of the test or inspection, location and nature of defects, causes for rejection, and remedial actions taken or proposed for any open items on prior deficiency reports including the date scheduled for resolution of the item.

K. Record Drawings: The QCM is required to ensure the record drawings, required by Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the Contract drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate modifying documentation (e.g. CN No., Modification No., Request for Information No., etc.). The QCM shall initial each deviation and each revision. Upon completion of work, the QCM shall furnish a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the record drawings prior to submission to the COTR.

L. Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Manuals: The QCM shall ensure that the Operation and Maintenance data required by Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” and the Warranties specified in Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” are inserted on a daily basis in the appropriate sections of the approved formatted manuals after they have been approved by the COTR.

1.20 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE

A. The COTR will notify the Contractor of any detected non-compliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such



notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may:

1. Issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of a claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages.

2. Repair, replace or otherwise remedy the defective work at the Contractor’s expense. Cost incurred by the Authority to correct defective work shall be deducted from the total amount due the Contractor.

3. Withhold an amount from the payment due the Contractor as may be deemed necessary at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.

4. Terminate the Contractor’s right to proceed for Default after providing required notice.

B. In cases where implementation of the Quality Control Program does not comply with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan or the contract provisions. Or Contractor fails to properly operate and maintain an effective Quality Control Program, the Contracting Officer may:

1. Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified Quality Control Personnel or subcontractors.

2. Issue an order stopping all or part of the work until acceptable personnel are on site and a new Quality Control Plan is approved by the COTR. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages.

3. Take a credit from the contract for Quality Control Activities not performed. 4. Terminate the Contractors right to proceed for Default after providing required notice.

C. The Contractor shall maintain a detailed record of every non-compliance and corrective action taken.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014000


REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section defines many of the terms used elsewhere in the Construction Documents and lists complete names and telephone numbers for many of the associations and agencies identified elsewhere in the Construction Documents by their acronym.

B. Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents, will be interpreted by the Contracting Officer to mean the normal construction industry terminology.

C. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of the Contract Documents.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in Sections I and II of the Authority Solicitation Offer and Award. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this Article. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to the extent that they may not be stated more explicitly in another element of the Contract Documents.

B. Approve: The term "approved," where used in regard to COTR's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to COTR's duties and responsibilities as delegated by the Contracting Officer in the Contract and Special Provisions.

C. Architect/Engineer: For the purpose of this Project, the "Design Professional of Record." To distinguish from the Contracting Officer and Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR).

D. Authority: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

E. Award: The acceptance, by the Authority, of the successful offeror's proposal.

F. Award Date: The date on which the Authority gives notice of acceptance to the successful offeror.



G. AOA (or A.O.A.): Air Operations Area. The area of the Airport used or intended to be used for landing, taking off, surface maneuvering, loading, unloading, or servicing aircraft. This security area requires security badging. Workers in this area are required to obtain and display an AOA photo I.D. credential. Drivers in this area are required to obtain an Airport Vehicle Operator's Permit for the Air Operations Area.

H. Beneficial Use: Use by the Authority prior to 100 percent completion and final acceptance.

I. Contract Documents: Documents containing requirements of the Work. These include all Contract provisions and attachments made thereto or referenced therein.

J. Contract Provisions: The administrative and procedural requirements starting at Award Date and ending at Final Acceptance, as provided for in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

K. Contract Time or Duration (Time Limit): The number of calendar days established in Section III, "Schedule," indicating the time allowed for the completion of all physical and administrative work contemplated in the Contract, including any authorized extensions thereto.

L. Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR): The Contracting Officer's designated representative, as defined in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

M. Contractor: Individual, partnership, corporation or joint venture under Contract to the Authority for performance of prescribed Work.

N. Drawings: Erection/installation/construction plans, or any other supplementary plans or similar graphic data, illustrating work to be performed that are provided to Contractor as part of the Contract Documents.

O. Directed: A command or instruction by the Authority. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

P. Final Acceptance: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

Q. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

R. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

S. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

T. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

U. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.



V. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name.

W. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

X. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is indicated.

Y. Punch list Work: Minor corrective actions required to achieve "Final Acceptance." Occurs after "Substantial Completion" of the Work in strict compliance with quality-control requirements.

Z. Roadway: General term denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular travel, including the entire area within the right-of-way.

AA. Special Provisions: For the purpose of this Contract, the directions and requirements provided for in Section VI of the Contract Documents.

BB. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittals."

CC. Specifications: General term comprising all directions, provisions and requirements contained herein, together with any other contractual requirements such as may be added or adopted as the Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, or Supplementary Conditions, all of which are necessary for the proper performance of the Contract.

DD. Substantial Completion: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for additional information regarding conflicting requirements.



1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to COTR for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project shall be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080 Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1530 www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement (601) 634-2355 Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station www.wes.army.mil DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point.

www.dodssp.daps.mil

Available from General Services Administration

www.fss.gsa.gov (202) 501-1021



Available from National Institute of Building Sciences

www.nibs.org (202) 289-7800

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org MIL See MILSPEC MS MIL See MILSPEC MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices

Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration (See FHA. Located in Paragraph Federal Government Agencies").

UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org



AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials http://www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 http://www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 http://www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 http://www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666



ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (505) 522-1437 Http://www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 http://www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 http://www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 http://www.asphaltroofing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600



AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 http://www.asphaltroofing.org BICSI BICSI (813) 979-1991 www.bicsi.org CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 http://www.asphaltroofing.org CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 http://www.asphaltroofing.org CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (800) 665-2472 http://www.asphaltroofing.org (819) 956-0425 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 http://www.asphaltroofing.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 http://www.asphaltroofing.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 http://www.asphaltroofing.org (706) 278-3176



CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 http://www.asphaltroofing.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org/ FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 http://www.asphaltroofing.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905 www.fscoax.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org



GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (See CSA) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150 www.issfa.net ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (607) 753-6711



ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 www.lma.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling Industry of America (See MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org



NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 http://www.necanet.org/ NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.netaworld.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966-5253 www.opl.com (210) 635-8100 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720



PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 Website Unavalible RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.sefalabs.com SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA) SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacentral.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI SPRI (781) 647-7026 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org



TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285-4476 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543



The Virginia Statewide Building Code (USBC) Virginia Department of Housing and Community Development

Division of Building and Fire Regulation 501 North 2nd Street Richmond, VA 23219-1321

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.doc.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (202) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov FHA Federal Highway Administration (410) 962-0093 www.fhwa.dot.gov GSA General Services Administration (202) 708-5082 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov



OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690 7694 phs.os.dhhs.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb TSA Transportation Security Administration 1(866)-289-9673 www.tsa.gov/public/index.jsp USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS United States Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

DCR Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (804) 786-1712 http://www.dcr.state.va.us VDH Virginia Department of Health (540) 829-7340 Culpepper District www.vdh.state.va.us (804) 371- 7160 VDOT Virginia Department of Transportation (703) 383-8368 www.virginiadot.org VDEQ Virginia Department of Environmental Quality 1-800-592-5482 www.deq.state.va.us





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls including the installation of temporary utilities, support facilities, security, and protection facilities for Contractor staging area.

1. For those items necessary to complete the Work they shall be installed as identified in

this specification.

B. Temporary utilities may include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 4. Heating and cooling facilities. 5. Ventilation. 6. Electric power service. 7. Telephone and other communication services.

C. Support facilities may include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Dewatering facilities and drains. 2. Project identification and temporary signs. 3. Waste disposal facilities. 4. Field offices. 5. Storage and fabrication sheds. 6. Lifts and hoists. 7. Temporary elevator usage. 8. Temporary stairs. 9. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Environmental protection. 2. Security enclosure and lockup. 3. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 4. Fire protection.



E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

2. Divisions 02 through 34 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products used in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by COTR, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weather tight; exterior walls are insulated and weather tight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Temporary utilities are available from the Authority at no charge unless otherwise noted. Provide necessary labor and materials to connect to the Authority's utilities at points designated by COTR and extend utilities to trailers, offices, sheds, etc., if such facilities are utilized by the Contractor.

1. Provide COTR approved meters for water, natural gas, electricity, and each other utility used for Project. Supply utilities to Subcontractors' temporary facilities through Contractor's meters. The requirement to provide meters for utilities does not imply that the Contractor will be charged for these utilities, except under provisions outlined in this and other Sections.

2. Report consumption of each utility to COTR each month. Contractor is expected to consume reasonable amounts of each utility. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion, use excessive amounts of any utility or waste a utility, Contractor may be required to pay for temporary utilities.

B. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but are not limited to, the following:

1. The Authority’s construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. COTR. 4. Architect/Engineer. 5. Testing agencies. 6. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit to COTR, for the Authority's review and approval, site plans indicating all temporary facilities, including support and security; utility connections and traffic flows. Provide detailed drawings of utility connections and special facilities.

B. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities at both staging area and the Project site. Make all



structures weather proof when heated and air-conditioned. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion fail to keep the heated and cooled structures sealed and weather proof, Contractor may be required to pay for temporary utilities.

C. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 calendar days of date established for submittal of Contractor's first Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility.


A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but are not limited to, the following:

1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Police and Fire Department regulations. 4. Environmental protection regulations. 5. ADA Compliance: All temporary facilities shall be ADA compliant.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.

2. Electrical Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Coordinate with the Authority’s Building Codes/Environmental Department for requirements for certifications, permits, and inspections.

1. Obtain permits from the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department for temporary construction and temporary utilities.

D. Fire-retardant and Flame Spread Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, fire – retardant treat all wood and wood composition products utilized in the Project and preservative treat all wood utilized on the exterior of any building. Preservative treat all wood utilized on other items indicated or specified with preservative treatment. Provide lumber and plywood with an Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) stamp certifying a value of 25 or less flame spread and a value of 200 or less smoke development. Fire retardant lumber shall not be ripped or milled.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to COTR, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.

1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service



during its use as a construction facility before the Authority's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary and permanent services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work:

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 3. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. 4. Do not overload facilities. 5. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to

develop or persist on-site.

1.8 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL PARKING

A. The Contractor's personnel will be allowed to park their personal vehicles in staging areas. Such designated parking areas are not necessarily fenced or otherwise protected and temporary fencing for such parking areas is a requirement of this Contract.

B. Contractor is responsible for busing his employees from the off airport parking lot to the Contractor's Staging areas or work areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by COTR. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Pavement: Comply with Division 32 Section "Bituminous Concrete Pavements."

C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."

D. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36.

E. Insulation: Un-faced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.

F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Painting."

G. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread index of 15 or less.

H. Water: Potable.



2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment suitable for use intended. If acceptable to COTR, undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used.

B. Field Offices: Prefabricatedwith lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading, and provided with proper tie-downs.

C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated re-circulation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.

D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.

1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.

E. Heating Equipment: Unless COTR authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide temporary heating units with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.

F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets that will prevent insertion of 110v or 120v plugs into higher-voltage outlets, and equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters with reset button.

G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted, overhead, and visible wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic-sheathed cable.

Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use hard-service as defined by NFPA 70, Article 400, where exposed to abrasion and traffic. If single lengths of extension cords will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical extension cords.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Prior to installation of temporary facilities and utilities, submit to the COTR a site layout providing locations and details of the facilities and utilities.

B. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.



C. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 CONTRACTOR STAGING AREA - GENERAL

A. Contractor will be allowed to store and stage his materials in the South Staging Area located on Airport property as designated by the COTR for such purposes. Space is limited to area indicated. COTR and Contractor will make a joint site visit to document condition of staging area prior to occupancy. Take photos for the record.

B. Storage of completed millwork shall be in an enclosed structure or vehicle and shall be protected from heat and humidity as recommended by millwork fabricator.

C. Erect and maintain an 8-foot high chain link fence topped with 3-strands of barbed wire around perimeter of staging area when the fence serves as an AOA barrier as required by the FAA/TSA. A 6-foot high fence as described above, including barbed wire will be acceptable for all other applications. Protect all stored equipment from the weather. The Authority accepts no responsibility for items stored in this area.

D. Upon completion of Construction, remove all temporary staging area facilities and return the areas to their original condition.

E. Park construction equipment in the storage site or storage area identified by the COTR when equipment is not engaged in construction activity.

F. Do not stockpile construction materials, spoils, debris or refuse in any area other than that specifically approved for such purpose by the COTR.

G. Constrain stockpiled material in a manner to prevent its movement by wind, jet blast or propeller wash.

3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide temporary service for each utility required. Comply with requirements of the Authority's Building Codes Manual, the Authority's Construction Safety Manual, and the requirements of all Sections of these specifications.

1. Arrange with COTR for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. For additional information on utility outages see Division 01 Section, "Summary."

2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services.

3. Perform work associated with utilities owned by the Authority as approved by the Authority.

4. See additional information in Contract Provisions entitled "Availability and Use of Utility Service."



B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner.

C. When using Authority sewers:

1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.

2. Connect temporary sewers to the Authority's system as directed by COTR. 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After

heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. 4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify

effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Water Service: Provide temporary water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. Provide Badger Recordall, Turbo II Utility type water meter to meter all water usage for 2-inch water feed lines and above. Provide Badger Recordall bronze disc water meter for to meter all water usage for water feed lines under 2-inches. COTR will approve water meters, in writing prior to installation of water meters. Do not install water meters until written approval has been received from COTR. Provide Watts Model 909, Type RPZ backflow preventers. Do not install backflow preventers until written approval of backflow preventers has been received from the COTR.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material.

2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units, located as approved by COTR. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. Use of the Authority's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled.

4. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units. 5. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than 2 stories

vertically or 200 feet horizontally to facilities.

F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that would not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.



G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation and humidity control required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that would not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. Provide and operate either exhaust or supply fans/blowers, or both, sufficient to ventilate work areas adequately.

H. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. Provide kilowatt-hour meters with demand capability.

1. Connect temporary service to the Authority's existing power source, as directed by COTR.

I. Electrical Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment.

1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. 3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage.

Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas.

4. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. 5. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot extension cord can reach each area for power

hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet.

J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

1. Provide and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Provide exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, parking lots, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed. Provide exterior yard and site lighting aligned as directed by the COTR. Provide lighting so as not to interfere with ground, air traffic and air traffic control.

3. Install lighting for Project identification signs.

K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service for key personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the construction period. Install telephones on separate lines for each temporary office and first aid station. Where an office has more that two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. Provide telephones with exchanges within the Metropolitan Washington service area. The Authority owns and operates an airport-wide Airport Communication System (ACS). This system accommodates all normal telecommunications service requirements, i.e., local, long distance, fax, data, etc. The Contractor may obtain information about and choose to utilize this service by contacting the ACS Help Desk at (703) 417-8300.



1. At each telephone, post a list of emergency telephone numbers approved by COTR. 2. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving

telephone calls when away from field office.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.

2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241 and USBC.

B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated or where directed by COTR to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Provide two Project signs.

1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details indicated.

2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors.

3. Construct signs of exterior-type, Grade B-B, high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thickness indicated. Support on nominal 4-inch-by-4-inch-by-10-foot-long posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel.

4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer.

5. The following signs will be allowed on the Project:

a. Identifying captions over offices. b. Other signs as required by the Contract Documents.

6. Take necessary steps to prevent installation of unauthorized signs and, should any appear, remove them immediately. Repair and repaint damage caused thereby at no additional cost to the Authority.

7. No more that two Project Identification Signs will be permitted. Project identification signs are the only signs on which the Contractors name and logo will be permitted.

C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.

1. If required by COTR, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited.

2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials.



D. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-aid stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas.

E. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or, if permitted by COTR, fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site subject to approval of COTR.

1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood.

2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer.

3. Submit the design of storage structures of more than 150 sq. ft. to COTR for review and approval by the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department.

3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours of 11:00 p.m. to 5:00 a.m., unless directed otherwise by the COTR, which will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.

B. Security Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 8 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 3 galvanized barbed-wire top strands, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. See the Authority's Construction Safety Manual for additional requirements.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.

2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with

load-bearing, wood-framed construction.



4. Use fire-retardant-treated wood and plywood for temporary enclosures. Use fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing.

F. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241 and VUSBC.

1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above.

a. Field Offices: Class A, stored-pressure, water-type extinguishers. b. Other Locations: Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of

extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. c. Locate fire extinguishers per NFPA 10 and where convenient and effective for

their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-

protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.

4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition.

5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.

6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

7. Provide temporary standpipes with fire hose valve connections for fire protection.

G. Storage: Where materials and equipment are stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with installation and release of material to minimize opportunity for theft and vandalism.

3.6 UTILITY PROVISIONS AT SOUTH STAGING AREA

A. Existing Conditions:

1. The Authority will provide at each lot in the South Staging area the following:

a. Two 2” conduits from the utility sheds, to the limits of the lot, one electrical and one telecommunications. The conduits will be capped below grade and signified by a 4” x 4” x 4’ wood stake at the limits of the lot.

b. Each lot will be allocated 100 A, 480 v 3 phase, 3 wire power. c. The power is available at the utility shed. Provide necessary conductors as

indicated in the “TELECOMMUNICATIONS” and “ELECTRICAL POWER” paragraphs below.



d. Domestic water service will be available at the limit of the lot, identified with a blue painted stake.

B. General Requirements:

1. Contractor is responsible for subdividing telecommunications, electrical and water within their assigned lot in a coordinated fashion upon mobilization. Provide a site plan for COTR review and approval. Maintain site plan up-to-date throughout the Project. Indicate on site plan trailer locations, proposed conduit runs, proposed telecom and electrical backboards, proposed water distribution and any other pertinent information. Locate and indicate existing utilities on site plan.

2. Install fence around Contractors allotted area and remove fence upon completion of Contractor’s Work. Refer to other paragraphs of this section for fencing requirements.

3. Contractor employee parking will be limited to within the allotted staging area. Provide transportation for Contractor’s employees between the work site and the staging area.

4. Water tank fill station is located on the south side of the entrance road to the Staging Area. Do not use the fire hydrants along the main staging area road for obtaining water.

5. Restore lot to its original condition upon contract conclusion.

C. Telecommunications:

1. The Airport Communications System (ACS) vendor will provide a pedestal or telecom backboard at the limits of the Contractor’s lot. The pedestal or telecom backboard is supplied via a communications cable installed by the ACS from the nearest utility shed to the limits of the Contractor’s lot. As the electrical and telecommunications are adjacent, excavation at the lot limits for both utilities should be completed at the same time. Determining the routing of all conduits from the telecom pedestal at the lot limits to each subcontractor trailer to avoid future cut cables. Originate all feeds within a lot at the pedestal location. Contractor’s attention is called to the fact that all telecommunications work between the utility sheds and the lot limits is the responsibility of the ACS. Should the Contractor perform any telecommunications work between the utility sheds and the lot limits, the ACS will remove work and the ACS will charge the Contractor for any cost associated with this removal of the work.

2. Provide all conduit installations either above or below ground in accordance with the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code and the applicable Division 26 Sections of the specification.

a. Communications cable:

1) Cable must be 24 gauge with solid, annealed, bare copper conductors 2) Conductors shall have polyolefin insulation, color coded to telephone

industry standards 3) Cable must have a black polyethylene outer jacket 4) Cable must have an aluminum or copper shield. 5) Cable must be Gel filled 6) Install in schedule 40 PVC conduits a minimum of 2” in diameter. 7) Advise the COTR of the total number of required telecom cable pairs,

including his subcontractor’s requirements, prior to any communications cable work within the lot.



3. Special telecom provisions: T1 service is available in the South Contractors lot at the Contractor's expense.. Telecom services can be ordered through the Airport Communications System vender. Please call the Authority at 703/417-8605 to order these services.

D. Electrical Power:

1. Conduit is provided from one of four sheds, to a location just inside each contractor lot. Extend the conduit, as required, to serve all facilities on Contractor’s site and provide cable back to shed. If power requirements greater than 100 ampere, at 480v, three phase, three – wire are required; requests for additional power will be considered on a case-by-case basis.

a. Transformers:

1) Suitable for outdoor use 2) Pad mounted with fused safety switches on the primary and secondary sides

of the transformer.

2. The Contractor is required to advise the COTR of the estimated electrical consumption including that of his subcontractors prior to provision of cable.

E. Plumbing: Provide a Watts Model 909, Type RPZ backflow prevention device at each trailer. Remove plumbing work in place upon contract completion. There are no sanitary sewer provisions, use above ground tanks specifically designed for sewage holding. The Contractor at his option may use chemical or electrical toilets. Clean, pump and haul sanitary waste. Maintain a clean and odor free lot.

F. Maintenance Requirements for Staging Area:

1. Unauthorized soil and concrete stockpiles are prohibited. 2. Cover all containers and drums of any size that are stored on site and their required

secondary containment to prevent rainwater from coming in contact with the containers. Earthen berms are not permitted. Clearly label all drums and containers used to hold trash and debris “Trash”. Empty drums and containers when full. Remove all unused empty drums and containers from the site.

3. Include Contractor’s lot in the South Staging Area in the SPPP. 4. Store all fuel, petroleum based products and products potentially detrimental to the

environment in aboveground tanks. 5. Aboveground storage tanks:

a. Double walled and approved for the use intended. b. Submit manufacturer’s literature to COTR for approval in writing for each such

storage tank intended for use by Contractor.

6. Store all trash, construction debris, and other debris in metal containers specifically designed for such use. Do not keep trash containers on the site for more than 90 calendar days.

7. Storage of used tires and batteries is prohibited. 8. Storage of waste oil is prohibited.



9. Only routine light equipment maintenance shall be permitted. Should Contractor require more than routine maintenance to be performed on site, submit a work execution plan to COTR, for written approval, describing the type of maintenance and the procedures that will be implemented to protect the environment.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Unless Contractor is able to utilize permanent fire protection, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Properly recondition and restore those portions of the site occupied by temporary facilities and controls to condition acceptable to COTR, at least equal to condition at time of start of Work, unless otherwise authorized in writing by COTR.

2. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

3.8 At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

1. This Section includes substitutions made for "or as approved by the Authority" items.


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products

specified. 4. Divisions 02 through 34, if included in this project, Sections for specific requirements for

warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-



service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form acceptable to COTR, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements.

4. Completed List: Within 60 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, submit 10 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements.

5. COTR's Action: COTR will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 calendar days of receipt of completed product list. COTR's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. COTR's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit six copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for Contract Modification proposals supplied to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting or as directed by COTR. Do not submit requests for substitutions as "Requests for Information" (RFIs).

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Authority and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.



c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Price. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

m. Failure by Contractor to include the above requirements in the submittal may cause rejection of the submittal in its entirety.

3. COTR's Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 15 calendar days of receipt of a request for substitution. COTR will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or two weeks of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change notice. b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. COTR’s Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 working days of receipt of a comparable product request. COTR will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or 7 calendar days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals." b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.



D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittals." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. There is no available storage for materials at Concourse C/D. Contractor shall ensure that fabricated products and materials are stored in a conditioned area where humidity levels are below 50%.

2. Schedule delivery of products that are scheduled to be installed within 48 hours of arrival.

3. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

4. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

5. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 7. Protect stored products from damage. 8. Replace products and materials damaged by the elements due to improper storage at no

additional cost to the Authority. This damage can be, but not limited to, oxidization, mold, mildew, warping, and rust.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations



on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Authority.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Authority.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. The Authority reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," COTR will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is

COTR's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. "Or as approved by the Authority": Note that products submitted under an "or as

approved by the Authority” provision are considered to be substitutions. Substitutions shall follow the requirements of Paragraph VII-42 of Contract Provisions and provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.



2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches COTR's sample. COTR's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: COTR will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 calendar days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at the sole discretion of the Contracting Officer.



B. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 2. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 3. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 6. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 7. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 9. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

C. Contractor's submittal and COTR's review or approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples that relate to a substitute does not by itself constitute a final approval of the requested substitution, nor does it relieve Contractor from fulfilling existing Contract requirements.

D. If a substitution offers a substantial advantage to the Authority, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Authority may be required to bear, the substitution shall be submitted as a Value Engineering Change Proposal.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Examination of existing conditions. 2. Preparation for work installation. 3. Construction layout. 4. General installation of products. 5. Coordination of Authority-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed (materials tests, inspections, acceptance tests, etc.) and record survey data as required under provisions in Division 01 Sections "Submittals" and "Project Closeout."


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work, including all site utility systems.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.



B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to COTR that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information (RFI) to COTR. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings. If discrepancies are discovered, notify COTR promptly.



3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Proceed only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to COTR. Coordinate this requirement with Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8’-2” in spaces without a suspended ceiling. 5. Roughing-in of utilities in areas with vaulted or domed roofs shall follow contour of roof

lines.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

D. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

E. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. For additional requirements see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by COTR.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints as directed by COTR. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 AUTHORITY-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for the Authority's construction forces.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by the Authority's construction forces.



1. Construction Schedule: Inform COTR of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for the Authority's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify COTR if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Pre-installation Conferences: Include the Authority's construction forces at pre-installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive the Authority's work. Attend pre-installation conferences conducted by the Authority's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on the Authority's construction.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Remove combustible debris from the site daily. 3. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 4. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-airport property will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.



I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Follow equipment manufacturer's startup procedures, unless otherwise directed by COTR.

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.



D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

3.10 HEIGHT LIMITATIONS

A. For equipment height limitations see "Supplementary Conditions."



CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Divisions 02 through 34 Sections, if included for the project, for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal, requesting approval from COTR to proceed, describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services, Mechanical/Electrical Systems, and Data Systems: List utilities that

cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for utility outage requirements.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of



reinforcement with original structure. When cutting and patching involves welding or open flame cutting, obtain the approval of the Authority's Fire Marshal for such work prior to its start.

7. COTR's Approval: Obtain COTR’s approval in writing of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive COTR’s right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Obtain COTR's written approval of the cutting and patching of the following operating elements or safety related items:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Conveying systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. 8. Data systems. 9. Security systems including CCTV and duress alarms.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 7. Insulating systems.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in COTR's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.



3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Should excavating and backfilling be required by cutting and patching operations comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Remove conductors back to source of supply.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.



4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather tight condition.



PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.


1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for final requirements of the Warranty Manual.

2. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Acceptance construction photographs and negatives.

3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Record Product Data, and other Record Documents.

4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

5. Divisions 02 through 34 Sections, if included for this project, for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Definition: "Substantial Completion" is the stage in the progress of the work when COTR determines that all the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and functional according to the Contract Documents so that the Authority can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The only remaining physical work shall be the completion of punch list work prior to Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, reasons why the Work is not complete, and a schedule for completing punch list work according to Section III of the Contract.

2. Ensure previously outstanding technical submittals and Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved.



3. Advise COTR of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit warranties required by Contract Documents, workmanship bonds, maintenance

service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

a. Submit Contractor Warranty Letter, for review and approval, a minimum of 60 days before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. After date of Substantial Completion has been determined revise the Contractor’s Warranty Letter to include that date as start of Warranty period.

5. Obtain and submit releases permitting the Authority unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

6. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents except Record Contract CPM Schedule; also prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information.

7. Prepare and submit proof that specified testing and code inspections have been completed, accepted and certified, including, but not limited to, structural work, sprinkler piping systems, fire alarm and FPS systems, bacteriological testing of domestic lines, back-flow prevention, electrical system testing, and hydrostatic pressure testing of sanitary lines. Submit approvals of Health Department or the FDA as applicable.

8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by COTR. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

9. Furnish combined key cores to the Authority. 10. Complete startup testing of systems. 11. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 12. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 13. Advise the Authority of changeover in utilities. 14. Submit changeover information related to the Authority's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 15. Instruct the Authority's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems, as required by Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." Submit demonstration and training videotapes.

16. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 17. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by COTR, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Punch list work must be completed within the duration specified in Section III, "Schedule." Failure to complete the punch list work within the duration specified may result in the Contracting Officer ordering the work to be completed by others at the cost to Contractor.

3. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Acceptance.



1.4 FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Definition: "Final Completion" is the stage in the Contract when the Contracting Officer determines that all Work has been 100 percent completed according to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including administrative obligations. The date of Final Acceptance is the date of execution by the Contracting Officer of a Certificate of Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

2. Submit certified copy of COTR's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by COTR. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit a Contractor/COTR joint statement evidencing that all Record Documents, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, warranties, and similar required submittals have been approved.

4. Complete demobilization and removal of temporary facilities from the site including construction equipment and facilities, mockups, and other similar elements. Restore areas to previously existing condition, if applicable.

5. Execute final Contract Modification and submit final Subcontractor Payment Form. 6. Return all AOA badging and all Authority Ids. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 8. Submit Record Contract CPM Schedule. 9. Submit warranty book. 10. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit four copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first andproceeding from lowest to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:



a. Contract name and number. b. Date. c. Name of COTR. d. Name of Architect/Engineer. e. Name of Contractor. f. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit one draft copy of proposed Warranty Manual Specified below within 90 days of Notice to Proceed. COTR will return comments to the Contractor no later than 30 calendar days after receipt.

1. Provide Manufacturer’s Standard Warranties, made out to the Authority, and statement of willingness to provide any applicable Special Warranties required by the Contract Documents 14 calendar days prior to shipping of materials and equipment. Products and Equipment shall not be considered delivered (for payment purposes) until the approved warranties have been received.

2. Submit written warranties on request of COTR for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by the Authority during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Warranty Manual: Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and major subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position locking mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

a. Provide maximum 3-inch binder thickness. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "PROJECT

WARRANTIES," Contract number and name, and subject matter of contents. If identification cannot be attached to the front include it as the first page in the manual. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business labels is prohibited.

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, plastic tabbed dividers, (, or as approved by the Authority) for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each tabbed section on the front and back of tabs. Tabs shall indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a description of the warranty or heading for sub tabs using the same laser printed format on the dividers. Provide an index of the contents in each section on



the first page behind each section divider. The index shall be generated using a word processor and printed on a laser printer. Include a matching master table of contents for each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between each different warranty within a tabbed section.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty that shall be include in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: For final cleaning, use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with Authority requirements, local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. General cleaning during construction is included in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site in areas disturbed by construction activities of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes of newly installed items to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances.

e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

f. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

g. Remove labels that are not permanent.



h. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

i. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

j. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. k. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils. l. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Authority's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Authority's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed by COTR.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory and formatting. 2. Manuals, General and formatting 3. Emergency Information Manuals and formatting. 4. Operation Information Manuals and formatting for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 5. Maintenance Information Manuals and formatting for the care and maintenance of

products, materials, finishes, systems, and equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section “Application for Payment” for values assigned to Operation and

Maintenance Manuals. 2. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for ensuring the development and

continuing update of the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3. Division 01 Section “Submittals” for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

5. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

6. Divisions 02 through 34, if included for this project, Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for products in those Sections.

C. For purposes of payment, O & M and Material and Finishes Manuals are to be valued at 3 percent of Contract. This amount is included in the 5 percent value specified in Division 01 Section “Application for Payment.”

D. Payment for materials and equipment will be withheld if complete O & M manual material is not received from the contractor at time of material or equipment delivery. Namely, instruction sheets, operation manuals, installation instructions, and other documents received from the manufacturer at the time of delivery.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.



B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

C. Equipment: An instrument or appliance designed for a specific operation.

D. Product: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

E. Location: A defined area such as roof, room, hallway, ceiling, pavement, wall, or floor that has special maintenance requirements that are documented in the Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Manual Format: Submit to COTR within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed one draft copy of the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manual Format. Format shall include a table of contents and be as specified in Part 2 of this Section. COTR will return comments regarding the Operation and Maintenance Manual Format and planned contents of the completed manual within 30 calendar days of receipt. Throughout the construction period of the project, Operation and Maintenance data shall be continually inserted in the appropriate sections/parts of the Manual as it is approved.

B. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Submit to COTR within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed one draft copy of the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory. Format shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section. COTR will return comments regarding the Directory and planned contents of the completed manual set within 30 calendar days of receipt of submittal. Throughout the construction period of the project, the Directory shall be updated to reflect changes resulting from other submittal approvals.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Initial Submittal: Submit four draft copies of each Manual in the approved format at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete Operations and Maintenance Directory. COTR will return a copy of draft within 30 calendar days of receipt, and mark whether general scope and content of Manuals are acceptable.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Revised Submittals: Submit 4 revised copies of each manual in final form, including one CD containing electronic O & M documentation, at least 45 calendar days before substantial completion or training, whichever occurs first. COTR will return a copy with comments within 15 calendar days after receipt.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Final Submittal: Correct or modify each manual to comply with COTR’s comments. Submit 6 copies of the Document Directory and each corrected manual at least 15 calendar days before substantial completion or training whichever occurs first.

1. Provide four copies of all Operation and Maintenance Data in electronic format on CD-ROM consistent with the organization and format in the “Manuals, General” section. All electronic files shall be in Adobe PDF format and limited to 10 megabytes in size per file.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, the General Contractor shall assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Provide the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory in separate binder from operation and maintenance information. Binders, dividers and all portions of the Directory shall comply with requirements of “Manuals, General” as applicable. Size of binder for directory shall be appropriate for quantity of contents. Information in O & M Directory shall be in alphabetical order with references to contract Division and Specification Section.

B. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. General Information. 2. List of systems and subsystems. 3. List of equipment. 4. List of Products 5. Table of contents.

C. General Information: Include documents that are pertinent to the project, including, but not limited to, a detailed description of the facility or project, general safety information and a users guide to the project operation and maintenance manuals.

D. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

E. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

F. List of Products: List products alphabetically to include all products not part of a system, subsystem, or component of equipment. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each product.

G. Tables of Contents: Include a complete table of contents for each volume of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

H. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment and products with the same designation used by the Authority. If no designation is provided for equipment, systems, sub-systems, or equipment assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, “Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.”



I. Provide a draft of the proposed “Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory” at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Submit draft to COTR for approval in writing.

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize information by Division and then into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information on the title page:

1. Specific subject matter included in manual such as Division number and title, Specification Section number and title, equipment, systems and subsystems.

2. Name and number of the Contract. 3. Date of submittal. 4. Name, address, telephone number, and contact person of Contractor, Subcontractor, and

supplier. 5. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. 6. Cross-reference to related systems in other portions of the Operation and Maintenance

Manuals.

C. Table of Contents: Include a printed, printed by a laser printer, table of contents for each volume, arranged according to the specification format. List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in the Contract Documents.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents by Division then by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring thermoplastic loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position Dublock mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom of binders. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

a. Provide maximum 3 inch binder thickness. Smaller binders are acceptable as long as 75 percent rated binder capacity is not exceeded.



b. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data for a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

c. Identify each binder on front (If Identification cannot be placed on the front provide as the first page) and spine, with printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Contract number and name, and specific subject matter of contents, such as “Division 23,” to include Specification Section. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business labels is prohibited.

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, and plastic tabbed dividers, for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each tab section (front and back of tabs), to indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a description of the product or heading for sub tabs using the same laser printed format on the dividers.

3. Provide a typed index describing each product, equipment, and subject addressed in each section on the first page behind each section divider. Include a matching master table of contents for each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between major topics and each different device within a tabbed section.

4. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Provide protective transparent plastic sheet protectors to enclose the Title Page, all Table of Content pages, and photographs.

a. For CD-ROMs, provide transparent plastic three-ring sleeves designed to accommodate CD-ROMs.

5. Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper. Copies of faxed materials may be rejected. Two-sided text shall be provided on 24-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper to eliminate “bleed through” of text with a minimum brightness of 96.

6. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in transparent envelopes and bind envelopes with text. Insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, in the transparent envelopes along with drawings. Drawings shall cross-reference the appropriate manual volume and Specification Section. Drawing holding envelopes are not acceptable.

c. Provide operation and maintenance material on CD-ROM.

E. Transfer Cases: Manuals shall be submitted in durable, multiple thickness fiberboard transfer boxes (legal-size boxes, 15 inches wide by 24 inches long by 10 inches high) with plastic tote handles string and button closures, reinforced poly edge, and a large labeling area that accurately describes the contents. Banker box, Fast Hold Liberty Plus P-12112 or as approved by the Authority.

2.3 EMERGENCY INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: Organize information by Division into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.



2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Fuel leak. 6. Power failure. 7. Water outage. 8. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 9. Chemical release or spill. 10. Weather related events, thunderstorms, hurricanes, tornados, etc.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of the Authority’s operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Provide a draft of the proposed Emergency Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.4 OPERATION INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information. Organize manuals into separate and distinct volumes by Division.

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Safety instruction and related issues. 3. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 4. Operating standards. 5. Operating procedures. 6. Operating logs. 7. Wiring diagrams, including color-coding and terminal designations. Include all factory

preset or field-set dip switch and jumper settings for all electronic equipment. 8. Control diagrams. 9. Piped system diagrams. 10. Precautions against improper use.



11. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 12. Material Safety Data Sheets.

B. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 10. Procedures or operations that may void warranty. 11. Copies of equipment warranties.

C. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

D. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed and color-coding shall be used where required for identification.

E. Provide a draft of the proposed Operation Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MANUAL

A. This Section shall contain information for all products with the exception of Systems and Equipment, which shall be provided as indicated elsewhere in this Section.

B. Content: Organize information into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Provide one section for architectural products, including applied materials and finishes, and a second for products designed for moisture protection and products exposed to the weather. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, schedule of products, location of products and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.



6. Fire/flame-spread test certificates. 7. Material Safety Data Sheets.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Schedule of Products and Locations: Provide complete information, including reference drawings, in the materials and finishes manual on all products specified in Divisions 02 through 34.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Provide copies of all applicable warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2. Clearly indicate commencement and expiration dates.

I. Provide a draft of the proposed Product Maintenance Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers’ maintenance documentation, preventative maintenance program, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. Organize information into separate and distinct volumes by Division, and further divided into separate volumes by system (for example, HVAC systems and plumbing systems).

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name, model number, and location. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics.



6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the room number location and function of each valve. 11. Circuit directories of panelboards for electric and electronic systems, including the

following:

a. Electric service. b. Controls. c. Telecommunications. d. Computer network. e. Security.

D. Manufacturers’ Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers’ maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Safety information. 2. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 3. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 4. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 5. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Preventative Maintenance Plan: Provide an annual preventative maintenance plan indicating when maintenance tasks should be performed, such that work is spread evenly as possible throughout the year. Preventative Maintenance should not be misconstrued as reconditioning, or major repairs or replacement of components, but designed to reveal through certain procedures and inspection the need for such actions in time to prevent malfunctions during operation.

F. Preventative Maintenance and Maintenance and Repair Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential preventative maintenance and maintenance and repair procedures:

1. Preventative Maintenance:

a. Provide instructions and location diagrams for the following:

1) Checking general condition of System and Components. 2) Inspecting for accumulation of dust, dirt or any foreign matter, and clean as

needed. 3) Cleaning or replacing all filters and screens and adjust packing for pumps,

valves, etc. 4) Examining indicating lamps, gauges, thermometers, etc., and replace as

required. 5) Checking electrical primary, secondary, terminal blocks and contacts, for

loose connections. 6) Checking Operation of strainers, valves, instruments and control switches,

including their contacts.



7) Checking instrument transformers for proper condition and replace burned out fuses.

8) Removing dust from all electrical insulators and insulation and inspecting bus bars and connections for proper condition, loose connection, and overheating or overloads.

9) Examining safety interlocks, automatic shutters, dampers, valves, etc, and their operating mechanisms for proper operation.

10) Checking space heaters, thermostats, and all controls for proper operation 11) Lubricating mechanisms, contacts, and other moving component parts. 12) Specific procedures applicable to specialized equipment and systems.

2. Maintenance and Repairs:

a. Include information and detailed diagnostic testing and inspection instructions, and procedures that detail essential system and equipment maintenance procedures including but not limited to:

1) Examination of shaft seal for excessive leakage. 2) Monitoring of systems for excessive bearing noise. 3) Checking equipment motor housing for excessive heat buildup. 4) Measuring and recording suction and discharge pressures. 5) Verifying lubrication requirements. 6) Realignment of shaft coupling. 7) Checking motor amperes drawn at full load. 8) Checking motor shaft run-out 9) Performing thermographic scanning of motor starters, motors, pumps and all

mechanical and electrical equipment that requires a connection. 10) Proper cleaning and corrosion control of drip pan and drainage lines. 11) Inspection of internal equipment components for unusual wear of failure. 12) Procedures for maintenance including precautions against improper

maintenance.

b. Include the following information and items that detail essential system and equipment repair procedures:

1) Complete troubleshooting guide. 2) Complete repair instructions including equipment and component removal,

disassembly, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 3) Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions including noise, vibration and

efficiency adjustments. 4) Demonstration and training videotape, if such videotape, CD or DVD is

provided by the manufacturer.

G. Maintenance Service Schedules:

1. Provide recommended frequencies, inspections, service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

a. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.



b. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers’ forms for recording maintenance.

H. Spare Parts List, Recommended Inventory Requirements and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

I. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

J. Schedule of Products and Locations: Provide complete information, including reference drawings if necessary, in the Equipment and Systems manual on all products specified in Divisions 02 through 34.

K. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of all applicable warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2. Clearly indicate commencement and expiration dates.

L. Provide a draft of the proposed Product Maintenance Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.7 WARRANTY INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and Major Subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties.

B. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring thermoplastic loose-leaf binders in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position DublLock mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

C. Identify each binder on front (If identification can not be attached to the front include it as the first page in the manual) and spine, with printed title "PROJECT WARRANTIES," Contract number and name. The use of business labels is prohibited.

D. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, tabbed dividers, for each separate section. Provide laser printed description front and back of tabs, to indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a typed index of the contents in each section on the first page behind each section divider. Include a matching master table of contents for the manual using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between each different warranty within a tabbed section.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



F. Provide a draft of the proposed Warranty Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Compile all required information, as it is approved, into volumes grouped first by specification Division and then by Section in accordance with the information requirements outlined in Part 2 of this specification section and the approved Operation and Maintenance Manual Format.

B. For the first Directory Submittal, prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to the complete manual set. Subsequent submittals of the Directory shall integrate this information by Division.

C. Emergency Information: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by the Authority’s operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

D. Product Maintenance Information: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating manufacturer’s product information, part numbers, description and care and maintenance instructions for each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

E. Operation and Maintenance Information: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance and repair data providing complete information for each system, subsystem and piece of equipment. Include complete operation, preventative maintenance, maintenance and repair instructions, and parts listing with sources indicated; recommended parts inventory listing, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer’s and Installer’s maintenance personnel..

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by the Authority’s operating personnel.

F. Manufacturers’ Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers’ standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet with black arrows to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Provide supplementary text if manufacturers’ standard printed data are not provided by the manufacturer. Provide supplementary text where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

G. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams and their relation to the structure or facility. Coordinate these drawings with



information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.”

H. Comply with Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for a schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications 3. Record Product Data. 4. Record Samples. 5. Record Schedule. 6. Miscellaneous Record Submittals. 7. Computer Aided Design and Drafting (CADD) requirements for Record Drawings.


1. Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation" for construction schedules as basis for Record Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for ensuring the record drawings and specifications are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the original Contract documents

3. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout " for general closeout procedures 4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 5. Divisions 02 through 34, if included for this project, Sections for specific requirements

for Project Record Documents of products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. CADD Record Drawings. Comply with the following:

1. Submit copies of CADD Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of complete, full-sized, CADD Record Drawings. Additional sets of drawings are not to be copied and submitted until after substantial completion to insure all changes are shown on the drawings. The COTR will facilitate review of drawings and indicate whether the CADD Record Drawings are acceptable. The COTR will return review comments indicating any corrections that need to be made to the drawings. The corrected CADD Record



Drawings may then be reproduced, and organized into sets, printed, bound, and submitted as final submittal.

b. Final Submittal: After construction is complete and changes are recorded, submit six complete, full-sized, printed sets of CADD Record Drawings. Include each sheet, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. Submit two copies of the CADD Record drawings in the approved electronic format. In addition, submit the original set of marked-up record drawings onto which the mark-ups were made.

B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal at the direction of the COTR.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.

D. Record Samples: Submit Record Samples as specified.

E. Record Schedule: Submit three copies of Record Schedule.

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Submit miscellaneous Record Submittals as specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: During construction, maintain one complete, full sized, set of blue- or black-line prints of the Contract Drawings, applicable shop drawings, and coordination drawings for record purposes. These drawings shall be updated periodically, by the contractor, in CADD to replace the hand mark-ups. The mark-ups shall be preserved for the record. A complete set of Contract Drawings in CADD will be provided to the Contractor for his use in maintaining the CADD Record Drawings. The CADD files will be provided in Bentley Microstation Version 8, or Autodesk AutoCAD Version 2009, as applicable to the discipline.

1. Maintenance of Drawings: Maintain the drawings in a clean, dry, legible condition. Keep drawings available during normal working hours for inspection by the COTR.

2. Preparation: Routinely mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the mark-ups on the record set.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later especially underground structures.

b. Record information in an understandable drawing technique. Ensure mark-ups are legible and reproducible.



c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check markups before enclosing concealed installations.

3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Duct size and routing. g. Locations of concealed internal utilities. h. Changes made by Change Notice and RFI. i. Changes made following COTR's written orders. j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. l. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

4. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, insert them into drawing set and assign an appropriate sheet number (one that follows the number sequence of the contract drawings). Show cross-references to the new sheets on the Contract Drawings. Update drawing index as needed to reflect new sheets.

5. Mark record drawings with red pen that will reproduce clearly. Use different colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or not indicated on the original Drawings.

7. Note applicable Construction Change Notices, Requests for Information, Technical Support Requests, and similar identification numbers, where applicable. Copies of change documentation shall be inserted into the set for clarification but are not a substitute for mark-ups. If identification numbers for documentation are marked on the drawing when no change resulted, indicate "No Change".

B. Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets: The contractor may add new sheets with supporting sketches and change documentation instead of marking original sheets when neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation or if the new sheets can show the changes more clearly or additional space is required for markup information.

1. Assign a number to each new sheet and cross-reference on the appropriate related sheets. 2. Consult with COTR for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to

record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. 3. Integrate newly prepared sheets into Record Drawing sets and update drawing index to

reflect new sheets.

C. Format:

1. Identify and date each Record Drawing. Include the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWING” in a prominent location on each sheet.

2. Cover Sheet shall have the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS”, Date, Name of Contractor, and signature.



3. Record CADD Drawings:

a. CADD files provided by COTR and utilized for recording of record mark-ups shall maintain the format of the files provided. Place electronic mark-ups in a newly created layer on each drawing.

b. CADD files created by Contractor: Organize CADD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Record Drawing set. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CADD file.

4. Include the following identification on newly prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING." d. Name of Architect/Engineer (if applicable). e. Name of Contractor. f. Initials of person incorporating the change. g. Drawing identification number. (Ixx/Dxx)

5. Organization of Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Prints: Organize newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Include any contract required coordination drawings and applicable shop drawings. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

D. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORD DRAWINGS

1. When there are multiple copies of the same sheet with different mark-ups on each copy, the General Contractor is responsible for consolidating all mark-ups onto a single copy of each individual sheet.

2. The information from all RFI's, Change Notices, Design Clarifications, field adjustments, or any other changes, must be noted on the appropriate drawing. These mark-ups must include enough information to clearly show the actual constructed conditions resulting from the change. The information may be drawn onto the drawing, copied onto the drawing or copied onto a new full size sheet. Every change in construction must have RFI’s, Change Orders or similar supplementary documents; therefore they must be copied in original size and attached to the back of the preceding drawing or at the end of the drawing set, as an appendix, as a full size sheet, same in size as the drawing set. Multiple RFI’s, CN’s and other supplemental documents may be copied in each single sheet.

3. All changes made on the drawings shall reference the appropriate RFI, Change Notices, Design Clarification, or details from the contractor prepared shop drawings. If the mark-up is due to a field adjustment, it shall be indicated as such.

4. Additional Sheets such as shop drawings and sheets showing copies of applicable change documentation must be inserted into the set as necessary. Such sheets shall have a title block.

5. All shop drawings showing information not on the construction drawings (with the exception of concrete embedded steel reinforcement bending drawings and steel reaction and fabrication drawings) shall be marked up and included in the record drawing set. They shall be the same size (changes in scale noted) as all other drawings, include a title block, and clearly indicate that they are record shop drawings. When the shop drawings more accurately show locations and conditions, they may be marked in lieu of referenced



on the original drawings. This does not relieve the contractor from the shop drawing inclusion requirements in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals that are a separate item

6. Include contract required coordination drawings in the record drawing set.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. These Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications shall be printed on paper any color but white. Use the same paper color throughout the Project. Use black font for these changes

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the brand name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable. 4. Upon completion of mark-up, submit a complete set of record Product Data to COTR for

the Authority's records. 5. Where Record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit

marked-up product data as an insert in the manual.

2.4 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL

A. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet the Authority's personnel at the site to determine which of the samples maintained during the construction period shall be transmitted to the Authority for record purposes. Comply with the COTR's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to the Authority's sample storage space. Dispose of other samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials.



2.5 RECORD SCHEDULE

A. Record Schedule Submittal: Immediately prior to date of inspection for Final Acceptance, submit a copy of the As-built Contract CPM Schedule (if applicable) to the COTR.

B. Mark the Contractor’s Construction Schedule to show actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. This Record Schedule shall be in same format as Contractor’s Construction Schedule. This Record Schedule shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to COTR.

1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products. b. Testing and qualification of tradesmen. c. Documented qualification of installation firms. d. Fire resistance and flame spread test results. e. Final inspection and correction procedures. f. Report of potable water testing. g. Backflow prevention certificates. h. Final inspections of all trades. i. Approvals of Health Department or FDA as applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Repair or reproduce torn or dirty sheets. Provide access to Project Record Documents for COTR's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing the Authority's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Division 01 Section “Application for Payment for cost values assigned to Demonstration and Training requirements.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Coordination and Meetings" for requirements for pre-instruction conferences.

3. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for preparing and submitting demonstration and training videotapes.

4. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data for preparing and submitting demonstration and training agenda and course of study.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit, 90 calendar days prior to request for substantial completion inspection, two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Provide two separate sessions per module. One session per module shall be conducted after normal working hours.

2. At completion of training, submit six (6) complete sets of training manuals for the Authority's use.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article provide credentials to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Provide credentials to demonstrate the capabilities and experience of firms required by this Section.



C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Submit two copies at end of each training module.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project. Provide 4 references for the Facilitator’s firm that will be used to determine if their training and education has indicated a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A videographer who is a trained professional with a minimum of five years experience in video taping training sessions.

C. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Coordination and Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. Review weather, forecasted weather conditions, and procedures to follow if conditions

are unfavorable for instruction that must occur outside.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with the Authority's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting the Authority's operations. Coordinate with COTR.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training agenda with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by COTR.

D. Ensure that approved Operations and Maintenance Manuals are available prior to conducting any training.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training agenda for each system, sub system, and equipment. Develop an instruction program for equipment that is not part of a system or a subsystem, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems, and terminal

equipment and devices. 2. HVAC instrumentation and controls.

B. Training Agenda: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each agenda. Submit to COTR 45 calendar days prior to request for substantial completion inspection. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Hazards/Material Safety Data Sheets. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.



4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training agenda into a combined training manual.

B. Provide conditioned space with tables and chairs for conducting the classroom portion of all training.

C. Provide instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training agenda, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and COTR for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct the Authority's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Furnish an instructor, approved by COTR, to describe basis of each system designed for this project, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. COTR will furnish Contractor with names of training participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with COTR with at least 15 calendar days’ advance notice. 2. Submit a daily training agenda (module) to COTR for review and approval for each

system/equipment no later than 15calendar days prior to the scheduled system equipment startup. After granting the agenda approval, COTR shall provide a listing of dates, times, and places of the training programs for Contractor coordination.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to the Authority. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.



MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF AIR TRAFFIC 020111-1

SECTION 020111 - MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF AIR TRAFFIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor shall be required to carry out his operations in a manner that will cause a minimum of interference with air traffic, and shall be required to cooperate with the FAA, the Authority, the airlines, tenants, and Contractors involved in work on other projects. All work shall be completed in accordance with FAA Eastern Region Order Number EA-5210-1C and FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-2E.

B. The Contractor shall be required to furnish for each area of operations his own two-way radio

equipment ground control and designate a foreman trained in the use of the equipment to be available at all times to receive instructions from FAA Control Tower personnel. Vehicles with two-way radios shall have amber nonflashing lights.

C. The Contractor shall be required to supply beam, bucket (barrel), and Class A barricades, and

warning flags and shall place, maintain, move, and store barricades and flags as appropriate. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit a Maintenance and Protection of Air Traffic Plan to the COTR

for review prior to any work beginning on the site. This plan shall include, but not be limited to: plan for hauling operations, flagmen locations and operations, barricade and warning flag layout and details of maintenance of traffic equipment and materials for each phase of work and on each roadway or haul route, temporary sign layouts, and other operational requirements that impact hauling and site access as well as aircraft or vehicular operations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL AND WARNING DEVICES

A. During construction operations within 160 feet of the centerline of taxiways, 128 feet of the centerline of Group V taxilanes, or 81 feet of the centerline of Group III taxilanes, the Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain beam barricades or flags along the edges of the construction area to warn the air and ground traffic to stay clear of the construction work. The barricades and flags shall be placed at intervals as shown on the plans or at intervals designated by the COTR. Red warning lights shall be provided on the beam barricades. The Contractor shall maintain red warning lights for night operations and red warning flags around or on all equipment, stockpiles or other areas as directed by the COTR.

B. Red warning lights shall be steady burn lights of at least 10 foot-candles or flashing red lights

meeting the requirements of the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways” for Type A, Type B flashers or Type C steady burn lights.



C. Red warning flags shall be two (2) feet square, tacked along a staff having a length of four (4)

feet and having a minimum thickness of one (1) inch. The staff shall be securely driven into the ground or attached to the pavement so that the top of the flag shall be three (3) feet above ground.

D. The Contractor shall employ watchmen to maintain and service all warning lights, barriers

and warning flags. All warning lights and flags shall be in operation at all times. The contractor is required to repair or replace defective control and warning devices within 8 hours of notice by the COTR of their inoperable or non-working condition.

E. The Contractor shall remove any traffic control or traffic signs located within the work area

and place them in a storage area or relocate as directed by the COTR. New traffic control or traffic signs if required, shall conform to the requirements of the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), 2003.

F. Any temporary pavement marking required on the runways, taxiways, service road and mobile

lounge road shall be placed in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular 150/5340-1G, plans and details, and Specification Section “Pavement Markings”.

2.2 BARRICADES.

A. Beam barricades shall be of the type detailed in the drawings. Beams shall be painted with alternating orange and white striping. One battery operated, pulsating omnidirectional red 12V high intensity light (TMC Safety Products Model L204 or equal) and one fluorescent orange plastic flag shall be mounted on the end of each beam barricade as detailed in the drawings. Beam barricades shall be furnished and maintained by the Contractor, and at the completion of the Contract shall become property of the Airport.

PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.1 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor’s responsibility for work areas and marking equipment is as follows: 1. No work is permitted to begin within the airfield or adjacent to aprons, taxilanes,

taxiways, runways, vehicle service roadways, or mobile lounge roadways without the submission and review of the Contractor Maintenance and Protection of Air Traffic Plan by the COTR.

2. All maintenance and protection of aircraft operating area measures shall be provided

and erected by the Contractor or as directed by the COTR.

3. Nothing shall be placed upon runways, taxiways, taxilanes, or aprons without authority of the COTR.

4. No vehicle shall enter a paved surface except at predetermined locations.

5. Beam barricades and warning flags shall be provided and erected by the Contractor

as shown on the plans or as directed by the COTR.



6. No private vehicles shall be allowed on the runways, taxiways, or taxilanes at any

time unless approved by the COTR. 7. Through the duration of the job any practice or situation that the COTR determines to

be unsafe or a hindrance to regular Airport traffic shall be immediately rectified. 8. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the controlling of his employees,

subcontractors and their employees with regard to traffic movement. 9. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good at his own expense all

injuries or damages to any portion of the work occasioned by his use of these facilities before completion and acceptance of his work.

10. Construction equipment shall not exceed a height of 20 feet above the top of existing

pavement unless prior written approval has been obtained from the COTR.

B. Scheduling of all maintenance and protection of work shall be performed a minimum of 14 days prior to the commencement of the work. During the work, the Contractor shall contact the COTR each day before he begins work to coordinate the status and nature of work to be done that day. The Contractor shall also report to the COTR at the end of each day to schedule the work he plans to do on the following day.

C. The Control Tower shall at all times have control of operations on or near active runways,

taxiways and approach zones. Before entering upon or crossing any runway or taxiway, the Contractor shall receive proper clearance from the Control Tower. Arrivals and departures of airplanes are under the control of the FAA Control Tower. Emergencies and operating conditions may necessitate sudden changes, both in Airport operations and in the operations of the Contractor. Aircraft operations shall always have priority over any and all of the Contractor’s operations. Should runways or taxiways be required for the use of aircraft and should the Control Tower or the COTR deem the Contractor to be too close to Airport areas used by aircraft for safety, the Control Tower or the COTR may, at their discretion, order the Contractor to suspend his operations, remove his personnel, plant, equipment and materials to a safe distance and stand by until the runways and taxiways are no longer required for use by aircraft.

D. Where any work is to be done on any operational runway or taxiway, the Contractor shall

notify the COTR sufficiently in advance so that provisions can be made to close the runway, taxiway or taxilane to aircraft traffic. Such work shall then commence in the most expeditious manner practicable so that the runway or taxiway can be reopened to air traffic at the earliest possible date.

E. The Contractor shall remove all equipment and all materials that would constitute a hazard to

traffic whenever work is not in progress. F. Violations of these regulations shall be considered a violation of the Contract itself and shall

be sufficient cause for halting the work without extending the time limit of the job.



3.2 BARRICADES AND WARNING FLAGS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for placing all barricades and warning flags to delineate work areas, excavations, trenches, pavement tie-ins, areas of pavement marking, joint repair or joint sealing, temporary traffic, etc.

B. All moving, placing, maintaining, and removal of barricades or warning flags for all stages of

work shall be incidental to work on this project. No separate payment will be made for each movement required.

PART 4 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS 4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements". B. The Contractor shall submit a maintenance of air traffic plan and hauling plan to the COTR

for review prior to any work beginning on the site. This plan shall include, but not be limited to: plan for hauling operations, flagmen locations and operations, traffic control devices layout and details, schedule for crossings of airfield pavements and other operational requirements that impact hauling and site access as well as Airport operations.



STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Provisions, and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete structural steel

work shown on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. Structural steel work is that work defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice" plus steel work listed below and shown on the structural drawings.

a. Furnishing and erection (welded connection) of the WT reinforcing to the existing Steel

Girders. b. Furnishing and application of shop paint, and field touch-up paint for designated

structural steel items. c. Furnishing of structural steel items shown in structural drawings required to be built into

or form part of work specified under other Sections, to appropriate trade at proper time with complete instructions and templates to facilitate installation. Verify proper installation of same.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Contract Provisions and Division 01 Specification Sections:

1. Product Data: Product data or manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards). a. Structural steel, including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical

properties. b. Structural steel primer paint.

2. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be prepared to include the following information: a. Complete details, schedules, procedures, diagrams, for fabrication and assembly of

structural steel members. b. Details of cuts, connections, and other pertinent data. c. Indicate welds by standard ASW symbols and show size, length, and type of weld. d. Cleaning and painting schedule. e. Welding requirements.



3. Test Reports, Inspection Reports and Certificates: Provide reports as necessary to ensure that

the tests and inspections specified in Paragraphs 4.1.C and 4.1.D have been executed. Submit the manufacturer’s certified mill reports that clearly show compliance with the applicable AISC mechanical and physical requirements.

4. Reports:

a. Submit certified copies of mill test reports for all steel furnished. Perform mechanical and chemical tests for all material regardless of thickness or use. No part of the ASTM specifications will be waived without written consent of the COTR.

b. Submit copies of prequalified and other welding procedures in form prescribed in “Structural Welding Code”.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient projection capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work.

1. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated an AISC-Certified Plant as follows:

a. Category: Category II, complex steel building structures. b. Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Design of Members and Connections:

1. Verify dimensions at Project Site without causing a delay in the work.

D. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges: Comply with the pertinent provisions of the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”.

E. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Qualification” requirements.

1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactory passed AWS qualification tests.

2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

F. Applicable Publications: The following publications listed below form a part of the Specification to the extent referenced.

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Publications:



a. Manual of Steel Construction ASD (Ninth Edition) – 1989 b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Building and Bridges – March 18, 2005

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

A 572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel

A 992 Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing

D 1457 PTFE Molding and Extrusion Materials

E 164 Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments

3. American Welding Society (AWS) Publication: D 1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel

4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Publications: SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

5. International Building Code 2006

G. In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word “shall” had been substituted for “should” wherever it appears; reference to the “authority having jurisdiction” shall be interpreted to mean the Authority.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project Site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. 1. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36 Grade 36, or ASTM A 572/ASTM A 992 Grade 50

B. Electrodes for Welding: E 70 XX, Low Hydrogen, Comply with AWS D1.1 Code.

C. Primer for all Structural Steel: Structural steel primer paint shall be one of the following:

1. Carboline Company “Carbocoat GP-818 or 115SG”; 2.0 mils dry film thickness. 2. Ameron Protective Coatings “Ameron 5105”; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.



3. Tnemec Co., Inc. “4-55 Versare”; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Physical Qualities: Use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.

B. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Workmanship, finish, and fabrication tolerances shall conform to AISC standards except as modified in this Section and with additions as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Fabrication, welding, workmanship, and finish shall be equal to the best practice in modern structural and bridge shops.

1. Where AISC standards allow alternate methods of fabrication, the method used shall be that which produces the higher quality of workmanship.

C. Manual Oxygen Cutting: Manual oxygen cutting shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch.

D. Connections: Weld connections, as indicated.

E. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

F. Markings: Prior to erection, members shall be identified by a painted erection mark. Connecting parts assembled in the shop for reaming holes in field connection shall be match marked with scratch and notch marks. Do not locate erection markings on areas to be welded or on surfaces of steel that will be exposed in the completed structure.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING

A. After inspection and before shipping, clean all steelwork to be painted.

1. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, spatter, slag, and flux deposits.

B. Clean exterior exposed structural steel to be shop painted in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specification No.6 Commercial Blast Cleaning.

C. Clean all surfaces not otherwise specified in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specification No.3 Power Tool Cleaning.

D. Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint to a minimum dry film thickness as recommended by manufacturer’s instructions. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. No painting shall be done when the surface temperature of the steel is below the temperature at which condensation will occur. Apply paint thoroughly and evenly to any surface in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. A pre-installation meeting shall be held as required in PART 4, “CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL”.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Surveys:

1. Examine the conditions under which the work is to be erected. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2. Consider all conditions that will affect the satisfactory erection of the indicated structural steel systems. Field verify existing construction requirements, existing conditions, restrictions, and clearances that affect structural steel reinforcing erection. Assume responsibility for all errors of detailing and fabrication and for the correct fitting and erection of the structural systems.

3. Visit the premises and advise the COTR of any discrepancy or conflicts. If any conflicts occur, necessitating departures from the Contract Drawings, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the COTR for written approval before performing any work where conflicts exist. Departures shall not be made without the prior written approval of the COTR. Approved departures shall be executed at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to safely complete work.

C. Field Assembly: Set steel reinforcing accurately with existing frame member that needs reinforcing. Align and adjust reinforcing before permanently fastening. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. All work shall be installed in correct location, alignment, and plumb to true planes. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances, supplemented and amended as specified in 3.3 “ERECTION TOLERANCES”.

D. Connections: Connections not detailed shall be designed in accordance with AISC.

E. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing.

F. Openings in structural steel required in field:

1. Make no openings without the specific written approval of the COTR. 2. Openings in structural steel shall be cut and/or reinforced only by structural steel Contractor,

and only with specific prior written approval of the COTR.

G. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.



1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1/5 mils.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Individual pieces shall be plumbed, leveled and aligned in accordance with the requirements of the “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The following describes the minimum inspection and testing required in the Contractor’s Quality Control (CQC) Plan and Program for the work of this section and is for CQC only. The implementation of the Contractor Quality Control Program does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to provide the work in accordance with the contract documents, applicable codes, regulations and governing authorities. The CQC plan and program shall include, but not be limited to, the following testing and inspection elements. These elements are provided only as a minimum starting point for the contractor to use to generate his complete CQC Program. The contractor shall engage an independent testing agency to perform the sampling, testing, and inspection specified herein, meeting requirements specified below.

B. Testing:

1. Field Tests: Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing.

2. Certified Test Reports: Certified copies of all mill test reports required by indicated ASTM specifications. Mill test reports shall prove that structural steel materials have been tested in accordance with required procedures and that the materials comply with all applicable requirements. a. Provide certified mill analysis covering all structural steel materials delivered to the work.

3. Correction of Deficiencies Indicated by Test Reports as Not in Compliance with Requirements: Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Additional tests shall be performed, at no expense to the Authority, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work.

4. Weld Testing:

a. Nondestructive Testing: AWS D1.1. Test locations shall be as selected by the COTR. If more than 20 percent of welds made by a welder contain defects identified by testing, then all welds made by that welder shall be tested by Radiographic or Ultrasonic testing, as approved by the COTR, and at no expense to the Authority. When all welds made by an individual welder are required to be tested, Magnetic Particle testing shall only be used in areas inaccessible to either Radiographic or Ultrasonic testing. Retest defective areas after repair.



b. Testing Frequency: Provide the following types and number of tests. 1) Fillet Welds: Twenty five percent of all fillet welds shall be inspected for 100

percent of their length using Magnetic Particle or Dye Penetrant methods. Those welds that are to be inspected shall be indicated on the shop drawings, and are subject to the COTR’s approval.

C. Inspection: 1. Visual Inspection of Welds: AWS D1.1. Section 6. Provide AWS-certified welding inspectors

for fabrication/erection inspection, testing and verification inspections. Welding inspectors shall visually inspect and mark welds, including fillet weld end returns.

2. Correction of Weld Deficiencies: Correct weld deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Check that unacceptable welds are removed, rewelded, and refinished.

3. Additional Inspections: Perform additional inspections as necessary to confirm any non-compliance of original work, to show conformance of corrected work, to show that all variances have been corrected in an acceptable manner, and to verify that completed structural steelwork, including materials, installation, fabrication, assembly, erection, inspection, and testing, meet the Contract Documents’ requirements.

D. Special Inspections: 1. Authority’s agent shall perform the required “Special Inspections” as defined by Section 1704

of IBC 2006. 2. The required "Special Inspections" shall be provided by others. The Contractor shall provide

the Special Inspector free access to the work area.

4.2 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Prior to the commencement of any work under this Section, and when directed by the COTR, meet at the Project site to review installation and coordination procedures. Among other topics, the coordination meeting shall address scheduling, preparation of surfaces contiguous with this work, adjacent construction, and interferences, if any. This meeting shall be attended by any and all trades, manufacturer’s representatives, and other interested parties whose work will be affected by the evolution of the work under this Section.

B. Submittals: 1. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed, and printed by the contractor and distributed

by him to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking, curbs, and nailers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.




A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood nailers, curbs, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, and waterproofing.

E. Use Category: AWPA U1-UC3A.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).



1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, except for items indicated to be wood-preservative-treated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Curbs.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

D. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as



determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

2. Provide blocking as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

3. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

4. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. Use copper naphthenate.

B. Wood Blocking, Curb, and Nailer Installation:

1. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

a. Provide wood blocking in non-fire-rated partitions, accurately positioned and firmly secured to metal studs, to support handrails, guardrails, fixtures, equipment, services, casework, lockers, gun lockers, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing, whether or not such blocking is indicated on Drawings.

b. Coordinate with Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing."

2. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plywood Backing Panel Installation:

1. Install panels so that label for fire-retardant-treatment is visible. 2. In communications rooms, provide plywood backing panels on all walls, from 6 inches

above finished floor to 8’-6” above finished floor. 3. In other rooms, provide plywood backing panels as required for installation of telephone

and electrical equipment and devices, and as indicated.




4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for requirements for Contractor’s Quality Control Program.



MEMBRANE ROOFING REPAIR 070151 - 1

SECTION 070151 – MEMBRANE ROOFING REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Membrane roofing repair.

2. Base flashing repair.


1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing repairs materials that are compatible with existing roof systems under conditions of service and application required.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Approvals approved for membrane roofing system repair identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty.

C. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to roofing repair. 2. Review base flashings, roof penetrations and equipment curbs.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Install materials that are compatible with existing roofing systems and will not violate conditions of existing roofing systems’ warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible sheet.



1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products Company. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics.

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing:

1. Manufacturer's standard reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.

2. Manufacturer’s non-reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing may be used for flashing pipe penetrations, and inside and outside corners, when the use of pre-formed accessories is not feasible.

C. Pre-formed Flashings:

1. Manufacturer’s thermoplastic polyolefin pre-formed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, and T-joint covers.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application; if required by manufacturer for the installation.

F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories as required for complete installation.

I. Provide roofing membrane of same type, material, thickness, and color as roofing membrane on existing as required for patching and repair.



2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. N/A

B. Substrate-Board Fasteners: N/A

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere membrane roofing over repair area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials at existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing membrane roofing system.

3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and pre-formed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and inside and outside corners with pre-formed flashing accessories, or with non-reinforced cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings under copings or trim, as indicated on Drawings.

3.5 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing repair from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing repair area, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to COTR.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing repair that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and repair membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to manufacturer requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


4.1 GENERAL

A. Conform to all applicable provisions of Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. The following describes the minimum inspection and testing required in the Contractor’s Quality Control (CQC) Plan and Program for the work of this Section and is for CQC only. The implementation of the Contractor Quality Control Program does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to provide the work in accordance with the Contract Documents, applicable codes, regulations, and governing authorities. The CQC Plan and Program shall include, but not be limited to, the following testing and inspection elements. These elements are provided only as a minimum starting point for the Contractor to use to generate his complete CQC Program. The Contractor shall engage an independent testing agency to perform the sampling, testing, and inspection specified herein, meeting requirements specified below.

4.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.



B. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed building insulation.


1. Division 07 Section for insulation specified as part of roofing repairs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:



1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION

A. General:

1. Locations specified below are solely for Contractor's general information and shall not limit locations of each insulation type.

2. Provide insulation at locations specified below, and at additional locations indicated on Drawings whether or not such additional locations are specified below.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.

a. CertainTeed Corporation; CertaPro Unfaced Insulation. b. Johns Manville; Unfaced Insulation. c. Owens Corning; Unfaced Thermal Batt Insulation.

2. ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

3. Thicknesses: As required to fully fill each gap and joint 4. General Locations: General filling of gaps and joints; provide in thickness as required to

fully fill each gap and joint.

C. Insulation - Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.

a. CertainTeed Corporation; CertaPro Commercial Board Insulation CB225 FSK. b. Johns Manville; Insul-SHIELD 225 FSK. c. Owens Corning; CW225 FRK Faced.

2. ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and IB; faced on 1 side with foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; nominal density of 2.25 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.

3. Thickness: 3 inches.



4. General Locations:

a. Cold-formed framing in exterior roof curb construction. b. Stick-clipped to back of architectural precast concrete panels.

2.2 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. c. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length

to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.


a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150. c. Gemco; Dome-Cap. d. Gemco; R-150. e. Gemco; S-150.

2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:

a. Ceiling plenums. b. Other locations where sharp ends of spindles would be exposed to human contact..

C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.




a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDERSLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.



1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 48 inches below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

D. Install glass-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced

blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

E. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.




4.1 GENERAL




PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.


1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 2. Division 26 and 27 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.


A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer.




A. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systemsin Project to a single qualified installer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Notify the Authority at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by the Authority.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping materials that have been approved by FMG.

B. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.



2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.

C. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

D. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

E. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

F. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Inspecting Agency: The Authority may engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with



ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.6 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. General:

1. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

2. Certain UL assembly designations are indicated on Drawings. Other UL assemblies may be proposed for use, consistent with required hourly rating, configuration and type of penetration to be firestopped, and other requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1001-1999, C-BJ-1001-1999, C-BK-1001-1999, F-A-1001-1999, F-B-1001-1999, F-C-1001-1999, W-J-1001-1999, W-K-1001-1999, or W-L- 1001-1999.

2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar.

C. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-2001-2999, C-BJ-2001-2999, F-A-2001-2999, F-B-2001-2999, F-C-2001-2999, W-J-2001-2999, or W-L-2001-2999.


a. Latex sealant.



b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Intumescent wrap strips. e. Firestop device.

D. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-6001-6999, F-A-6001-6999, or W-L-6001-6999.


a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Mortar.


4.1 GENERAL



WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IT1001CONCOURSE C/D REHABILITATION: 2010/2011 – ROOF TOP UNIT REPLACEMENT SEPTEMBER 14, 2010

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1

SECTION 220517 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.2. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch

2.2 GROUT

minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

, 28-day compressive strength.


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in partitions.

1. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

B. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

C. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping smaller than NPS 6b. Piping

: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.NPS 6


and larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor’s Quality Control Program.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1

SECTION 220518 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 2

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type

with concealed hinge.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed exposed-rivethinge.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.


4.1 GENERAL




GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves.2. Bronze ball valves.


1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3. Division 33 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.



3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

stem extensions and the following features:

E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.



2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.b. Hammond Valve.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. CWP Rating: 600 psigc. Body Design: Two piece.

.

d. Body Material: Forged brass.e. Ends: Threaded.f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.g. Stem: Stainless steel.h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.i. Port: Full.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.b. Hammond Valve.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. CWP Rating: 600 psigc. Body Design: Two piece.

.

d. Body Material: Bronze.e. Ends: Threaded.f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.g. Stem: Stainless steel.h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.i. Port: Full.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.



3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

and smaller:

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim.


4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.2. Metal framing systems.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Fastener systems.5. Pipe positioning systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:



1. Metal framing systems.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.b. Flex-Strut Inc.c. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips.5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.8. Paint Coating: Vinyl.9. Plastic Coating: Epoxy.



2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use inhardened Portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi

PART 3 - EXECUTION

, 28-day compressive strength.

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

E. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.



G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

H. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inchb.

thick.NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch

c.thick.

NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inchd.

thick.NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch

e.thick.

NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

thick.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.



3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches

3.4 PAINTING

.

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes

.

NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes

of insulation.NPS 1/2 to

NPS 244. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes

if little or no insulation is required.NPS 1/2 to NPS 4

5. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes

, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

NPS 3/4 to NPS 86. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes

.

NPS 1/2 to NPS 87. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes

.

NPS 1/2 to NPS 88. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes

.

NPS 1/2 to NPS 89. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes

.

NPS 3/8 to NPS 810. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes

.

NPS 3/8 to NPS 311. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes

.NPS 1/2 to NPS 30

12. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers .

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

1. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F2. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

piping installations.

3. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.

4. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

piping installations.

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.



5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lbb. Medium (MSS Type 32):

.1500 lb

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): .

3000 lb

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.


4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.4. Stencils.5. Valve tags.6. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch3. Minimum Letter Size:

.1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch

2. Letter Color: Black.thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Background Color: White.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

.



inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.



C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch

B. Letter Color: Red.

thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.



C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

.

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch

F. Minimum Letter Size:

.

1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.


H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches

2.4 VALVE TAGS

high.

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch

1. Tag Material: Brass,

numbers.

0.032-inch. Aluminum, 0.032-inch

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.


B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.



2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

minimum.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.



6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

in areas of congested piping and equipment.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Hot Water and Return Piping:

a. Background Color: Yellow.b. Letter Color: Black.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 2 inches

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

square.

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

PART 4 - CCONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels.6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ or ASJ-SSL.Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.




a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-75.d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.



D. ASJ Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




Company; 85-20.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.





E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.



2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.




Company; 30-35.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.



2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel.


Company; 60-95/60-96.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36.

c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Phenolic Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:





Company; 30-45.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.5. Color: White or gray.6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: White.6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.




a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Chil-Glas Number 10.

B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.


a. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston.b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.3. Color: Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.



2.10 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.b. Compac Corporation; 130.c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches.3. Thickness: 6 mils.4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 500 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

2.11 SECUREMENTS

A. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.



2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.



L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular



surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that isuniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

6. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

2. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:



1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation whenavailable.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.



3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints.5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.




A. Testing Agency: The Authority will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of threaded valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed are at the Contractor’s option.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick.b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. None.2. PVC, Color-Coded by System: 30 mils thick.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. None.2. PVC, Color-Coded by System: 30 mils thick.



PART 4 - CONTRACTIOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Specialty valves.


A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Specialty valves.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Vacuum breakers.


A. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.




A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by The Authority or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the Authority no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without the Authority's written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

water tube, drawn temper.

2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K

1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

water tube, annealed temper.

2. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.2) NIBCO INC.3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.

b. NPS 2 and smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.



2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Watts Regulator Co. a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.c. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg Fc. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.c. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg Fd. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

.



D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psigc. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

.

d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Grinnell Mechanical Products.b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.c. Victaulic Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.b. Electroplated steel nipple. Complying with ASTM F 1545.c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg Fd. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

.

e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.



E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

H. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

I. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

J. Install piping free of sags and bends.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

M. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

N. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.



F. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

and larger.

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

and smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2


and smaller: Use dielectric couplings, nipples or unions.

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42 clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feetb. Longer than

and less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.100 Feet

c. Longer than : MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

100 Feet

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs

if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

100 Feet

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

or longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.



B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

.

1. NPS 3/4 and smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch2.

rod.NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every

rod.

10 feet

3.7 CONNECTIONS

.

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

and larger.

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.



3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.



3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

200 ppm

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2

1. Hard copper tube,

and smaller, shall be:

ASTM B 88, Type L

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2

2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.and larger.




4.1 GENERAL




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers.2. Wall hydrants.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 150 psig


, unless otherwise indicated.


B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control test reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:


a. MIFAB, Inc.b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.c. Woodford Manufacturing Company.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1011.3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain for freeze areas.4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.6. Provide one spare vacuum breaker hose connection to owner upon completion with O&M

documentation.

2.2 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

a. Josam Company.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.c. Woodford.d. Watts Drainage Products Inc.e. Woodford Manufacturing Company.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig4. Operation: Loose key.

.

5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp.

6. Inlet: NPS 3/4.



7. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.8. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.9. Provide one spare stem seal repair kit to owner upon completion with O&M

documentation.

2.3 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents

1. Body: Bronze.2. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.

.

4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.5. Size: NPS 3/86. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

minimum inlet.

7. Provide one spare float and seal kit to owner upon completion with O&M documentation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to various Division 22 Sections for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install air vents at high points of water piping.

C. Install wall hydrants in side of equipment curb as indicated with detail provided with contract documents. Contractor shall make any adjustments for submitted and approved wall hydrant as required to meet the intent of the detail and equipment manufacturer’s installation guidelines.

D. Install code approved, tamperproof hose-connection vacuum breaker to approved wall hydrant.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.


A. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.




4.1 GENERAL




HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010 - 1

SECTION 230010 – HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Definitions.2. Permits, Fees and Notices. 3. Applicable Publications. 4. Code Compliance. 5. Scope of Work. 6. General Building Description. 7. HVAC System Description. 8. Integrated Automation System Description. 9. Record Drawings. 10. Intent of Drawings and Specifications. 11. Quality Assurance. 12. Submittals. 13. Product Requirements, Equals and Substitutions. 14. Manufacturer’s Instructions. 15. Delivery, Storage and Handling. 16. Coordination. 17. Cutting, Patching and Demolition. 18. Clean Up/Removal of Debris. 19. Items to be Re-used. 20. Starting of Systems. 21. Guarantee of Work. 22. System Testing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.



D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The term "As indicated" means as shown on drawings by notes, graphics or schedules, or written into other portions of Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled" and "specified" have same meaning as "indicated", and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information.

G. The term "Provide", means furnish and install as part of the work covered in Division 23.

H. The term "Furnish" means furnish only, for installation, as part of this contract, by other Divisions.

I. The term "Install only" means to install under the work of Division 23 equipment furnished by other Divisions, or by the Authority.

J. The term "The Authority” when referenced herein shall be the Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority or their designated representative, the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR), the Architect or the Engineer acting as his designated representative unless otherwise noted.

K. The term "design" as it pertains to the work of this division shall describe the basic intent, component sizing, component relationships and overall architecture of the HVAC, plumbing and fire protection system. The design is generally schematic in nature and will require specific detailing after the approved products are determined.

L. The term "detail" as it pertains to the work of this division shall describe the work required by the Contractor to assure a fully coordinated installation of the material and equipment supplied. When requested, the Contractor shall produce detailed shop drawings or sketches indicating the actual placement of the equipment or material supplied; also including how the equipment or material interfaces with work of other sections or divisions within the Contract Documents.

M. The term "workman-like manner" as it pertains to the work of this division shall describe a neat well organized high quality installation system (duct, pipe, control wire or tube, conduit, etc.). Routing shall be well thought out providing adequate service clearance and maximum use of space. Equipment placement shall exhibit proper clearances for service. All lines (duct, pipe, control wire or tube, conduit, etc.) shall be run straight and true, parallel or perpendicular to building structure neatly supported.

N. For additional definitions refer to the General Conditions.

1.4 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES

A. Comply with the General Conditions.



1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publications listed in each Section form a part of that Section to the extent referenced.

B. When a standard is specified by reference, comply with requirements of that standard, except when requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes establish stricter standards.

C. The Publication or Standard is the publication in effect as of the bid date, except when a specific date is listed.

1.6 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work to be performed under this Division consists of the satisfactory completion of all HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING AND SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.7 HVAC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. HVAC Cooling and Heating Design parameters (MWAA Design Manual 2009):

1. Outdoor:

a. Summer 90.4 db 74.3 wb. b. Winter 14.5 db. c. Location based on MWAA weather data i.e., Washington Dulles International

Airport.

2. Indoor Cooling and Heating Design Conditions - General:

a. Cooling 75 db 50 % rh.* b. Heating 70 db. ** * There is no direct control over space RH. The value listed is the estimated av-

erage RH. The space RH will be dictated by dew point temperature control but will not normally exceed the listed values by more than ±5%.

** Winter humidification is not provided.

3. Ventilation air quantity/basis (ASHRAE Standard 62-2004 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality).

4. For details, see HVAC System Design Parameters form to be included in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS




1.9 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The intent of the drawings and specifications is to establish minimum acceptable quality standards for materials, equipment and workmanship, and to provide operable mechanical systems complete in every respect.

B. The drawings are diagrammatic, intending to show general arrangement, capacity and location of system components, and are not intended to be rigid in detail. Final placement of equipment, other system components, and coordination of all related trades shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

C. Due to the small scale of the drawings, and to unforeseen job conditions, all required offsets and fittings may not be shown but shall be provided at no additional change in contract cost.

D. In the event of a conflict, the Authority will render an interpretation in accordance with the General Conditions.


A. Material furnished under this Division shall be standard catalogued products of recognized manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the latest design.

B. Materials shall be the best of their respective kinds. Materials shall be new except where the specifications permit reuse of certain existing materials.

C. Work provided for in these specifications shall be constructed and finished in every part in a workmanlike manner.

D. All items necessary for the completion of the work and the successful operation of a product shall be provided even though not fully specified or indicated on the drawings.

E. All work shall be performed by qualified, experienced personnel specifically trained in their respective field.

F. All work of this division shall be carefully interfaced with the work of other divisions to assure a complete, functioning system or systems.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to all other submittal requirements elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall comply with the following.

B. Submittal for approval is required only on those items specifically requested in the specification section that applies.

C. For products and equipment that do not require a submittal for approval, submit a separate letter for each specification section certifying that all products and equipment will be provided in compliance with the Contract Documents.



D. Provide submittal data in accordance with the General Conditions and/or as listed below.

E. Designate in the construction schedule, or in a separate coordinated schedule, the dates for sub-mission and the dates that the submittals will be needed in order to meet construction schedule. This schedule shall be submitted prior to or in conjunction with the first submittal. Processing of submittals may be delayed pending the receipt of this schedule at the reviewer's discretion.

F. Submittal data shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner and referenced to the specification section.

1. Where applicable, data shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers, equipment or unit number as shown on Contract Drawings.

G. Prepare performance and product data as follows:

1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models, delete non-pertinent data.

2. Show performance characteristic and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 5. Clearly list any deviation in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract

Documents. 6. Include installation requirements.

H. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:

1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the work of this project.

2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work of this project.

I. Letter of Certification:

1. Where a submittal is not required, provide letter certifying that the work will be completed in strict accordance of the specified requirements. In the event the Contractor wishes to alter the requirements of the specification for whatever reason, this should be clearly explained in this letter noting that this alteration may require additional submittal requirements.

J. Schedules:

1. Where schedules are called for, submit schedule indicating which products will be used and to what extent by system, location, size, etc.

K. Where samples are requested, samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:

1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integral related parts and attachment devices.

2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.



3. Where a mock-up is specified, erect at the Project site, in a location acceptable to the Authority. Size or area shall be that specified or as agreed upon during pre-construction or other job site meetings.

4. Where mock-up is not a permanent part of the installation, remove mock-ups at conclusion of work or when acceptable to the Authority.

L. The Contractor shall:

1. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples prior to submission. 2. Determine and verify:

a. Field measurements. b. Field construction criteria. c. Catalog numbers and similar data. d. Conformance with specifications. e. All submittals have been properly interfaced with the requirements of this and

other divisions of work so as to assure a complete, functioning system in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. 4. Clearly identify any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract

Documents. 5. Do not release equipment for shipment, begin fabrication or work on any item, which

requires submittal for approval until return of submittal with COTR approval. 6. Make submittals promptly, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or in

the work of any other Contractor.

M. Number of Submittals:

1. Comply with the General Conditions.

N. Submittals shall contain:

1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. 2. The Project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. The names and phone numbers including personal contact of:

a. Contractor.b. Supplier. c. Manufacturer.

5. Identification of the product, with the specification section number and contract document description clearly indicated.

6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 8. Applicable standards. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 11. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of

products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the



information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.

12. Each submittal shall be limited to a single specification section. Submittals shall not be grouped with other sections in common binders or under common control sheets. Each submittal shall have a cover/control sheet containing the information listed above (a thru k) and have a minimum of 8" x 3" clear space for the general contractor’s, engineers and architects review stamp.

13. Submittals which do not comply with these requirements may be returned with no action taken at the reviewers’ discretion.

O. The Authority will:

1. Review submittals promptly and where special attention is requested, review in accordance with the schedule required.

2. Review the submittal for general compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for quantities, dimensions, placement of the product, coordination with all other trades occupying the space, maintain service clearance, function and compliance with the written installation instructions.

3. Determine the appropriate action for the submittal. Action codes will be as follows:

Action Description

a. A: No exceptions taken. b. B: Make corrections to exceptions noted. Resubmittal not required. c. C: Make corrections to exceptions noted and resubmit. d. D: Not in compliance with Contract Documents. Resubmit. e. N: Not required for review. No action taken. Copy retained for reference.

4. Turn around time will generally be within 14 calendar days on properly prepared submittals.

5. Review comments will generally be on a separate attached sheet.

P. Resubmission requirements for "as specified" products.

1. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Authority and resubmit until approved.

2. A submittal shall only be reviewed a maximum of 3 times. If upon the third resubmission an approved action cannot be rendered (A or B action), the Contractor shall supply the basis of design product and bear all costs incurred by the Authority during the review process until an approved submittal is achieved.

Q. The Contractor shall maintain one copy of all approved submittal data including letters of compliance in a job site file.

1.12 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS, EQUALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. In addition to all other requirements for submittals, equals and substitutions elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall comply with the following Product Requirements:

1. The specifications sections under Article 2.1 "ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER", lists suppliers found acceptable for this project. The names listed are manufacturers who meet



the minimum acceptable standards that this project dictates. The list is furnished as a guide. Even though a manufacturer is named, he must still provide the type and quality of equipment specified as well as equipment that will fit within the allotted space and within the design weight allowance, etc. Being named does not imply permission for that manufacturer to provide an alternative product or design. Other manufacturers not named will be considered to be equal providing they furnish a product of the type and quality specified and submit detailed product descriptive data including a line-by-line comparison of his product compared to the specified product, at least 14 days prior to bid date so that the product can be reviewed. If found to be acceptable, the name can be added as acceptable by Addendum.

2. In certain cases, foundations and/or structural supports for equipment specified in this Division are provided under other divisions of the specifications. Where an alternate acceptable manufacturer's product is provided, the Contractor shall coordinate the revised requirements and include an allowance for any cost differential.

3. If the list, under Article 2.1 "ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS" names only one manufacturer followed by "No Substitutions" that product shall be supplied.

B. Substitutions.

1. A substitution is defined as any product which does not meet the requirements as outlined in PART 2 - PRODUCTS. A different design which accomplishes the same result will be considered a substitution. The same design which requires a larger motor, or more space or a structural change to accommodate larger weight, etc., will be considered a substitu-tion. If there is any question on the part of a manufacturer as to whether his product is considered as an equal or as a substitution, submit details to the Authority10 days in advance of bid date and a decision will be rendered. If necessary, a clarification will be issued in the form of an Addendum. The Contractor may also request a substitution after award of the contract.

2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including.

a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified in tabulated format.

b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution. c. Effect on the construction schedule. d. Cost, extra credit, or statement of no change in contract price. e. Any required license fees or royalties. f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials.

3. The Authority shall determine the acceptability of the proposed substitution. 4. A request for a substitution constitutes that the Contractor:

a. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.

b. Will provide the same warranties for the substitution as for the product specified. c. Will coordinate the installation of the substitution into the work, and make such

other changes as may be required to make the work complete in all respects. d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may

subsequently become apparent. e. Will absorb all costs incurred by the substitution when affecting other trades

including but not limited to electrical, structural, architectural, etc.



f. Will absorb any cost incurred by the Authority in review of the substituted product if the acceptance of the substituted item creates the need for system modification and/or redesign, or if the substituting Contractor exhibits negligence in his substituting procedure thus submitting inferior, misapplied or miss-sized equipment. In the event of additional engineering costs the billing structure shall be agreed upon prior to review by all involved parties.

C. The COTR will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and will issue an addendum or notify Contractor, in writing, of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution.

D. The Authority will review substitution submittals for compliance a maximum of two times. If the submittal or substituted product does not comply with the Contract Documents on the second submittal, the submittal and product will be rejected and the specified product will be required.

E. The COTR may request further review of the substitution after the second submittal rejection if the Contractor agrees in writing to accept responsibility for the cost of additional review time and expenses by the Authority.

F. In the event a substitution is rejected, supply the products which constituted the basis of design at no change in the contract price.

1.13 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with The Authority for clarification. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.


A. Comply with General Conditions.

B. Store products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

C. Store products to prevent damage by the elements. Space temperature shall be controlled as required to prevent condensation and metal corrosion or damage to electrical or electronic parts which are the result of condensation.

D. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

E. Provide protection as necessary to prevent damage after installation.

F. Products which suffer damage due to improper storage shall not be installed and if found in place, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.



1.15 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for space, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for integrated automation installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for integrated automation items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

1.16 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DEMOLITION


1.17 CLEAN UP/REMOVAL OF DEBRIS


B. Maintain a clean work area. Construction debris shall be immediately removed from all newly erected work.

1.18 ITEMS TO BE REUSED

A. Certain items of equipment are to be reused. These are designated on the drawings.

1.19 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

A. Provide material and labor to perform start-up of each respective item of equipment and system prior to beginning of test, adjust and balance procedures.

B. Provide labor to assist the Authority in acceptance review.

C. Provide point-by-point system checkout. Submit results in tabulated form by system. Include this data as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

D. Provide information and assistance and cooperate with test, adjust and balance services.

E. Comply strictly with manufacturer's recommended procedures in starting up mechanical systems.

F. Provide such periodic continuing adjustment services as necessary to ensure proper functioning of mechanical systems until acceptance and up to 1 full year after date of the Authority’s acceptance.



1.20 GUARANTEE OF WORK


B. Where applicable, furnish manufacturer's written warranty for materials and equipment.

C. Insert warranties in appropriate locations in operating and maintenance manuals.

D. Materials and equipment, which have seasonal operation limitations, shall be guaranteed for one year from date of seasonally appropriate test, and acceptance in writing by the Authority.

1.21 SYSTEM TESTING

A. Provide all necessary labor, materials and equipment to successfully complete all system testing necessary for building occupancy and the Authority’s acceptance.

B. Provide all necessary labor, materials and equipment to assist Contractors of other division to complete system testing necessary for building occupancy and the Authority’s acceptance, wherever an inter-relationship between Division 23 and the work of other divisions exists.

C. Tests shall be repeated as necessary until all occupancy and operation permits are granted and the Authority accepts the project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)

PART 4 – CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING 230130.51 - 1

SECTION 230130.51 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ASCS: Air systems cleaning specialist.

B. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.


A. Qualification Data: For an ASCS.

B. Strategies and procedures plan.

C. Cleanliness verification report.


A. ASCS Qualifications: A certified member of NADCA.

1. Certification: Employ an ASCS certified by NADCA on a full-time basis.2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified as an ASCS by NADCA.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for fibrous-glass ducts.

C. Cleaning Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to HVAC air-distribution system cleaning including, but not limited to, review of the cleaning strategies and procedures plan.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system components to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for performance of the Work.

B. Perform "Project Evaluation and Recommendation" according to NADCA ACR 2006.

C. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a written plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. At a minimum, include the following:

1. Supervisor contact information.2. Work schedule including location, times, and impact on occupied areas.3. Methods and materials planned for each HVAC component type.4. Required support from other trades.5. Equipment and material storage requirements.6. Exhaust equipment setup locations.

B. Use the existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.

C. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006, "Guidelines for Constructing Service Openings in HVAC Systems" Section.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006.

B. Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system.

C. Systems and Components to Be Cleaned:

1. Air devices for supply and return air.2. Air-terminal units.3. Ductwork:

a. Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes and reheat coils, to the air-handling unit.b. Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit.

4. Air-Handling Units:

a. Interior surfaces of the unit casing.b. Coil surfaces compartment.



c. Condensate drain pans.d. Fans, fan blades, and fan housings.

5. Filters and filter housings.

D. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning process.

E. Particulate Collection:

1. For particulate collection equipment, include adequate filtration to contain debris removed. Locate equipment downwind and away from all air intakes and other points of entry into the building.

2. HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for particles sized 0.3 micrometer or larger shall be used where the particulate collection equipment is exhausting inside the building.

F. Control odors and mist vapors during the cleaning and restoration process.

G. Mark the position of manual volume dampers and air-directional mechanical devices inside the system prior to cleaning. Restore them to their marked position on completion of cleaning.

H. System components shall be cleaned so that all HVAC system components are visibly clean. On completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to cleaning operations.

I. Clean all air-distribution devices, registers, grilles, and diffusers.

J. Clean visible surface contamination deposits according to NADCA ACR 2006 and the following:

1. Clean air-handling units, airstream surfaces, components, condensate collectors, and drains.

2. Ensure that a suitable operative drainage system is in place prior to beginning wash-down procedures.

3. Clean evaporator coils, reheat coils, and other airstream components.4. Clean condenser coils, compressors, wiring, and refrigerant piping.

K. Duct Systems:

1. Create service openings in the HVAC system as necessary to accommodate cleaning.2. Mechanically clean duct systems specified to remove all visible contaminants so that the

systems are capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see NADCA ACR 2006).

L. Debris removed from the HVAC system shall be disposed of according to applicable Federal, state, and local requirements.

M. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Source-Removal Cleaning Methods: The HVAC system shall be cleaned using source-removal mechanical cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the



HVAC system and to safely remove these contaminants from the facility. No cleaning method, or combination of methods, shall be used that could potentially damage components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the integrity of the system.

a. Use continuously operating vacuum-collection devices to keep each section being cleaned under negative pressure.

b. Cleaning methods that require mechanical agitation devices to dislodge debris that is adhered to interior surfaces of HVAC system components shall be equipped to safely remove these devices. Cleaning methods shall not damage the integrity of HVAC system components or damage porous surface materials such as duct and plenum liners.

2. Cleaning Mineral-Fiber Insulation Components:

a. Fibrous-glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in equipment or ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment while the HVAC system is under constant negative pressure and shall not be permitted to get wet according to NADCA ACR 2006.

b. Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to fibrous-glass components and will render the system capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see NADCA ACR 2006).

c. Fibrous materials that become wet shall be discarded and replaced.

N. Coil Cleaning:

1. Measure static-pressure differential across each coil.2. See NADCA ACR 2006, "Coil Surface Cleaning" Section. Type 1, or Type 1 and

Type 2, cleaning methods shall be used to render the coil visibly clean and capable of passing Coil Cleaning Verification (see applicable NADCA ACR 2006).

3. Coil drain pans shall be subject to NADCA ACR 2006, "Non-Porous Surfaces Cleaning Verification." Ensure that condensate drain pans are operational.

4. Electric-resistance coils shall be de-energized, locked out, and tagged before cleaning.5. Cleaning methods shall not cause any appreciable damage to, cause displacement of,

inhibit heat transfer, or cause erosion of the coil surface or fins, and shall comply with coil manufacturer's written recommendations when available.

6. Rinse thoroughly with clean water to remove any latent residues.

O. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings:

1. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings if active fungal growth is reasonably suspected or where unacceptable levels of fungal contamination have been verified. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations and EPA registration listing after the removal of surface deposits and debris.

2. When used, antimicrobial treatments and coatings shall be applied after the system is rendered clean.

3. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings directly onto surfaces of interior ductwork.4. Sanitizing agent products shall be registered by the EPA as specifically intended for use

in HVAC systems and ductwork.



3.4 CLEANLINESS VERIFICATION

A. Verify cleanliness according to NADCA ACR 2006, "Verification of HVAC System Cleanliness" Section.

B. Verify HVAC system cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before applying any treatment or introducing any treatment-related substance to the HVAC system, including biocidal agents and coatings.

C. Perform visual inspection for cleanliness. If no contaminants are evident through visual inspection, the HVAC system shall be considered clean. If visible contaminants are evident through visual inspection, those portions of the system where contaminants are visible shall be re-cleaned and subjected to re-inspection for cleanliness.

D. Additional Verification:

1. Perform surface comparison testing or NADCA vacuum test.2. Conduct NADCA vacuum gravimetric test analysis for nonporous surfaces.

E. Verification of Coil Cleaning:

1. Measure static-pressure differential across each coil.2. Coil will be considered clean if the coil is free of foreign matter and chemical residue,

based on a thorough visual inspection.

F. Prepare a written cleanliness verification report. At a minimum, include the following:

1. Written documentation of the success of the cleaning.2. Site inspection reports, initialed by supervisor, including notation on areas of inspection,

as verified through visual inspection.3. Surface comparison test results if required.4. Gravimetric analysis (nonporous surfaces only).5. System areas found to be damaged.

3.5 RESTORATION

A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and components according to NADCA ACR 2006, "Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems" Section.

B. Restore service openings capable of future reopening. Comply with requirements inDivision 23 Section "Metal Ducts." Include location of service openings in Project closeout report.

C. Replace fibrous-glass materials that cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections “Metal Ducts.”

D. Replace damaged insulation according to Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation."

E. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.



F. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall have removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.

PART 4 - CONTRCTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL


END OF SECTION 230130.51


COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers.2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

above sea level.



2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.



2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.2. Split phase.3. Capacitor start, inductor run.4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.



4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop Piping Supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Rooftop Piping Supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP PIPING SUPPORTS

A. Rubber/Steel Pipe Supports:

1. Curb Base: 100% Recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 2

2. Minimum Support Capability: 500 lbs per linear foot.3. Curb Base Dimensions: Minimum 6 inches wide x 4 inches tall.4. Steel Frame: Min 14ga. Galvanized Strut per ASTM A653.5. Hardware: Zinc – plated threaded rod, nuts, and attaching hardware per ASTM B633.6. Weathering Requirements:

a. 70 hours at 120 degrees F. per ASTM D573.

1) Hardness Retention: 100% (±5%).2) Compressive Strength: 100% (±5%).3) Tensile Strength: 100% (±5%).4) Elongation Retention: 100% (±5%).

7. Based on Cooper B-Line Durablock Model DB Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Roof top Piping Support Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and recommendation. Install supports at a minimum of every 10 linear feet. Install properly sized clamps to suit supported piping.

B. Install supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

C. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slope of 1/8” per linear foot to drainand to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches


beyond bottom of nut.

4.1 GENERAL




VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND 230548 - 1

SECTION 230548 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.2. Housed spring mounts.3. Spring hangers.4. Pipe riser resilient supports.5. Resilient pipe guides.6. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.7. Restraining braces and cables.8. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 90.2. Building Classification Category: I.3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft.


multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.



2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight andoperation, and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, and wind restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

4. Wind Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 23Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis forapproval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of wind bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and wind restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.



C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. The vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of spring rates to accomplish the specified minimum static deflections for all spring and pad type isolators based on the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.

E. The vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural design of steel beam bases and concrete inertia bases to support mechanical equipment scheduled to receive a supplementary base.

F. Vibration isolation shop drawings shall show isolator locations, and load on each isolator, deflection, compressed spring height, solid spring height, spring diameters and color coding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Isolation Technology, Inc.2. Kinetics Noise Control.3. Mason Industries.4. Thybar Corporation.5. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.6. Vibro-Acoustics.



B. General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand wind forces.

C. Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind forces. Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches

D. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on

of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly.

1/4-inch-

1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with wind restraint.

thick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.

a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt.

b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

a. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant standard neoprene.

E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch

F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over roof materials.

thick.

2.2 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use.3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and wind control devices to indicate

capacity range.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

B. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

.

D. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

E. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

G. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or



drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with the Authority, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.7. Measure isolator deflection.8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.9. Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks.

Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.10. Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling system.11. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties.12. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.




3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism.

D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

E. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Authority's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

3.7 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. Supported or Suspended Equipment: All RTU units.

1. Equipment Location: Roof.2. Base Type: Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof Curb Rails.3. Minimum Deflection: 2 inches.4. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.5. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5.6. Component Amplification Factor: 1.0.


4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.4. Duct labels.5. Stencils.6. Valve tags.7. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch

2. Letter Color: White.thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Background Color: Black.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

.



inches

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.



B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

2.2 PIPE LABELS

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section numberand title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches

2.3 STENCILS

high.

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.



1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint

may be in pressurized spray-can form.3. Identification Paint: Exterior, in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise

indicated.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch

1. Tag Material: Brass,

numbers.

0.032-inch

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.


B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

minimum.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identificationdevices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.



3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 20 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

in areas of congested piping and equipment.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Refrigerant Piping:

a. Background Color: Yellow.b. Letter Color: Black.

2. Condensate Drain Piping:

a. Background Color: Green.b. Letter Color: White.

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For supply ducts.Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

2. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.

B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1inch

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 20 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering



hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches,2. Valve-Tag Color: Natural.

round.

3. Letter Color: Black.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

PART 4 - CONTACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.b. Variable-air-volume systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB Contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:



1. Instrument type and make.2. Serial number.3. Application.4. Dates of use.5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Contractor’s Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB Contractor and certified by AABC, NEBBor TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB Contractor and who is certified by AABC,NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Contractor and COTR, on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.b. The TAB plan.c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB Contractor's forms approved by the COTR and Architect.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

F. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

G. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."




A. Full Authority Occupancy: The Authority will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with the Authority during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with the Authority's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days’ advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts” and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.



G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units; such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine heating and cooling coils for correct refrigerant piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

L. Examine heat exchanger sections of gas fired units for leaks and burners for proper operation.

M. Verify gas flue(s) is unobstructed.

N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.



1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.



a. Where sufficient spaces in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub main ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of sub main and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in sub main and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each sub main and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust sub main and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.



1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.



8. Record final fan-performance data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.2. Motor horsepower rating.3. Motor rpm.4. Efficiency rating.5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data.2. Airflow.3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.3. Airflow.4. Air pressure drop.5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.



3.1 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.3. Check the refrigerant charge.4. Check the condition of filters.5. Check the condition of coils.6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.2. Coils are clean and fins combed.3. Drain pans are clean.4. Fans are clean.5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent.2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 5 percent.

3.3 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'



balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.4 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves.2. Manufacturers' test data.3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.2. Name and address of the TAB Contractor.3. Project name.4. Project location.5. Architect's name and address.6. Engineer's name and address.7. COTR's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.b. Notable characteristics of systems.c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:



a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.b. Conditions of filters.c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.3. Refrigerant Pipe sizes.4. Terminal units.5. Balancing stations.6. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and unit size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Unit arrangement and class.g. Discharge arrangement.h. Sheave make, size in inchesi. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

, and bore.inches

j. Number, make, and size of belts..

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inchesf. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

, and bore.inches

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

.

a. Total air flow rate in cfmb. Total system static pressure in

.inches wg

c. Fan rpm..

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wge. Filter static-pressure differential in

.inches wg

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in .

inches wg.



g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wgh. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in

.inches wg

i. Outdoor airflow in .

cfmj. Return airflow in

.cfm

k. Outdoor-air damper position..

l. Return-air damper position.m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Coil type.d. Number of rows.e. Fin spacing in fins per inchf. Make and model number.

o.c.

g. Face area in h. Tube size in

sq. ft.NPS

i. Tube and fin materials..

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Air flow rate in cfmb. Average face velocity in

.fpm

c. Air pressure drop in .

inches wgd. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in

.deg F

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in .

deg Ff. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in

.deg F

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in .

deg Fh. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

.

i. Refrigerant suction pressure in psigj. Refrigerant suction temperature in

.deg F

k. Inlet steam pressure in .

psig

G. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:

.

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and unit size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Fuel type in input data.g. Output capacity in Btu/hh. Ignition type.

.

i. Burner-control types.j. Motor horsepower and rpm.



k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.m. Sheave make, size in inchesn. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

, and bore.inches


.

a. Total air flow rate in cfmb. Entering-air temperature in

.deg F

c. Leaving-air temperature in .

deg Fd. Air temperature differential in

.deg F

e. Entering-air static pressure in .

inches wgf. Leaving-air static pressure in

.inches wg

g. Air static-pressure differential in .

inches wgh. Low-fire fuel input in

.Btu/h

i. High-fire fuel input in .

Btu/hj. Manifold pressure in

.psig

k. High-temperature-limit setting in .

deg Fl. Operating set point in

.Btu/h

m. Motor voltage at each connection..

n. Motor amperage for each phase.o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h

H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:

.

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Coil identification.d. Capacity in Btu/he. Number of stages.

.

f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.g. Rated amperage.h. Air flow rate in cfmi. Face area in

.

j. Minimum face velocity in sq. ft.

fpm


.

a. Heat output in Btu/hb. Air flow rate in

.cfm

c. Air velocity in .

fpmd. Entering-air temperature in

.deg F

e. Leaving-air temperature in .

deg Ff. Voltage at each connection.

.

g. Amperage for each phase.

I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:



a. System identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Arrangement and class.g. Sheave make, size in inchesh. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

, and bore.inches

2. Motor Data:

.

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inchesf. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

, and bore.inches

g. Number, make, and size of belts..


a. Total airflow rate in cfmb. Total system static pressure in

.inches wg

c. Fan rpm..

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wge. Suction static pressure in

.inches wg

J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

.

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg Fd. Duct static pressure in

.inches wg

e. Duct size in .

inchesf. Duct area in

.

g. Indicated air flow rate in sq. ft.

cfmh. Indicated velocity in

.fpm

i. Actual air flow rate in .

cfmj. Actual average velocity in

.fpm

k. Barometric pressure in .

psig

K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

.

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Apparatus used for test.d. Area served.



e. Make.f. Number from system diagram.g. Type and model number.h. Size.i. Effective area in


sq. ft.

a. Air flow rate in cfmb. Air velocity in

.fpm

c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in .

cfmd. Preliminary velocity as needed in

.fpm

e. Final air flow rate in .

cfmf. Final velocity in

.fpm

g. Space temperature in .deg F

L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

.

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Room or riser served.d. Coil make and size.e. Flowmeter type.


a. Air flow rate in cfmb. Entering-water temperature in

.deg F

c. Leaving-water temperature in .

deg Fd. Water pressure drop in

.feet of head or psig

e. Entering-air temperature in .

deg Ff. Leaving-air temperature in

.deg F

M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

.

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.b. Serial number.c. Application.d. Dates of use.e. Dates of calibration.

3.5 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:



1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.b. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of terminals.c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.

2. The TAB Contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of the COTR upon request.

3. The COTR shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, the COTR may contract the services of another TAB Contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB Contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

DUCT INSULATION



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.


1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches2. Sheet Jacket Materials:

square.12 inches

3. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range of colors available for each type of finish material.

square.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation



materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developedindex of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified inDivision 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.b. Johns Manville; Microlite.c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

2. Density: 1.0 lb/cf.3. Maximum thermal conductivity per inch: 0.27 at 75o

4. Maximum service temperature: 250F.

o

2.2 ADHESIVES

F.

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.






Company; 85-60/85-70.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. Fire / smoke tested in accordance with ASTM E-84.3. ASTM C-916, Type 2.4. Service temperature range: -20 deg F to 200 deg F.

E. ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Neoprene based contact adhesive for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




Company; 85-50.

2. Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E-84.3. ASTM C-916 compliance.4. Service Temperature: -30 deg F to 200 deg F.5. Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil

3. Service Temperature Range:

dry film thickness.

Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

.

5. Color: White.



2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36.

c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F5. Color: White.

.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




Company; 95-44.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F5. Color: Aluminum.

.

D. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:





2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F5. Color: White.

.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

3. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches2. Thickness:

.11.5 mils

3. Adhesion: .

90 ounces force/inch4. Elongation: 2 percent.

in width.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

in width.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


.6.5 mils

3. Adhesion: .


in width.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

in width.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


.3.7 mils

3. Adhesion: .


in width.

5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.



2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch

3. Aluminum: wide with wing seal.

ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inchthick, 3/4 inch

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

wide with wing seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding,

diameter shank, and length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

0.106-inch-diameter shank, and length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch

3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from galvanized carbon-steel washer.

0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel or stainless-steel sheet, matching duct material, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches

a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

in diameter.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-

D. Wire:

wide, stainless steel or Monel.

0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy or 0.062-inch

2.9 CORNER ANGLES

soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209

PART 3 - EXECUTION

, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.



2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.



2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least o.c.

2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

o.c.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches

3.4 PENETRATIONS

beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

below top of roof flashing.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant..

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.



D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" and fire-resistive joint sealers.

.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Adhesive may be omitted from top surface of horizontal rectangular ducts and plenums.

2. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16inches

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than o.c.

18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way and 3 inches

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

3. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-footintervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.



Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches

4. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of

.

2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

o.c.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches


o.c.




1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to compensate retesting and reinspecting work until it is considered within compliance of the contract documents.

3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.4. Flexible connectors.5. Vibration-control devices.6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.



3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:


C. Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:


D. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:


E. Exposed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:



4.1 GENERAL




INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.


1. Division 23 Section "Systems Integration" for requirements that relate to this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. I/O: Input/output.

C. PC: Personal computer.

D. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

E. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds.

2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds.

3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction.

4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.



8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows:

a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg Fb. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.

.

c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg Fe. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus

.1 deg F

f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus .

2 deg Fg. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus

.3 deg F

h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus .

0.25 deg Fi. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent.

.

j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wgn. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus

.0.1-inch wg

o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading..

p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm.q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices.3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.5. Written description of sequence of operation.6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.8. DDC System Hardware:



a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware.c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk

data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.

9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

10. Controlled Systems:

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.d. Points list.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat cover with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat cover.


A. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135.

B. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with LonWorks.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

D. Software Upgrade Kit: For the Authority to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions.

E. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances.



5. Calibration records and list of set points.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files.3. Device address list.4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Invensys Building Systems.2. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.3. McQuay International.4. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.



5. TAC Americas, INC.6. Tridum / Vykon.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.

2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications.b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

3. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover.

c. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization; and security access.

d. Remote communications.e. Maintenance management.f. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).

4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

5. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.



B. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications.b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

5. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.

C. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),

or resistance signals.4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights.

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer.

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

D. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes.3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

E. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.



4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.3 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Performautomatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit.

4. LonWorks Compliance: Communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol using LonTalk protocol.

5. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F6. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at

.40 to 150 deg F

2.4 ALARM PANELS

.

A. Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting. Fabricate of 0.06-inch-

B. Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch, mounted on hinged cover.

thick, furniture-quality steel or extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish. Provide the Authoritydesignated common keying for all panels.

1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds.2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady.3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady.4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished.5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company.

2.5 ANALOG CONTROLLERS

A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor.

B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.



C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision forremote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority.

1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer.

D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.

E. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment, direct or reverse acting with mechanical set-point adjustment with locking device, proportional band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode.

1. Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span, input signal of 3 to 13 psig

2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for .

5 psig3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent.

.

4. Air-supply pressure of 18 psig, input signal of 3 to 15 psig

5. Gages: 2-1/2 inches in diameter, 2.5 percent wide-scale accuracy, and range to match transmitter input or output pressure.

, and output signal of zero to supply pressure.

2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Manufacturers:

a. BEC Controls Corporation.b. Ebtron, Inc.c. Heat-Timer Corporation.d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.e. MAMAC Systems, Inc.f. RDF Corporation.g. McQuay International.h. Siemens.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than

9 sq. ft.

6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of

10 sq. ft.

2-1/2 inches.



7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.c. Thermometer: Concealed.d. Orientation: Vertical.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

C. RTDs and Transmitters:

1. Manufacturers:

a. BEC Controls Corporation.b. MAMAC Systems, Inc.c. RDF Corporation.d. McQuay International.e. Siemens.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than

9 sq. ft.

9 sq. ft.6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of

; length as required.2-1/2

inches7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.c. Thermometer: Concealed.d. Orientation: Vertical.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Manufacturers:

a. BEC Controls Corporation.b. General Eastern Instruments.c. MAMAC Systems, Inc.d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.e. TCS/Basys Controls.f. Vaisala.g. McQuay International.h. Siemens.



2. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wgd. Duct Static-Pressure Range:

.0- to 5-inch wg

3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum

.

150-psig4. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction,

suitable for service; minimum

operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig

5. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

E. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.3. Thermometer: Concealed.4. Orientation: Vertical.

F. Room sensor accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.2. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.

2.7 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg

B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of

.

8 to 60 psig

C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

, piped across pump.

D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.

F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.



G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

1. Manufacturers:

a. BEC Controls Corporation.b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.c. McQuay International.d. Siemens.

2.8 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers:

1. B. W. Technologies.2. CEA Instruments, Inc.3. Ebtron, Inc.4. Gems Sensors Inc.5. Greystone Energy Systems Inc.6. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control.7. INTEC Controls, Inc.8. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.9. MSA Canada Inc.10. QEL/Quatrosense Environmental Limited.11. Sauter Controls Corporation.12. Sensidyne, Inc.13. TSI Incorporated.14. Vaisala.15. Vulcain Inc.16. McQuay International.17. Siemens.

B. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors using solid-state plug-in sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of 32 to 104 deg F

C. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors; suitable over a temperature range of

; with 2 factory-calibrated alarm levels at 35 and 200 ppm.

23 to 130 deg F

D. Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state zircon cell sensing; suitable over a temperature range of

and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output; for wall mounting.

minus 32 to plus 1100 deg F

E. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivitycontrol, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment; for flush mounting.

and calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output; for wall mounting.



2.9 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS

A. Duct Airflow Station: Combination of air straightener and multiport, self-averaging Pitot tube station.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Air Monitor Corporation.b. Wetmaster Co., Ltd.c. Ebtron.d. Siemens.

2. Casing: Galvanized-steel frame.3. Flow Straightener: Aluminum honeycomb, 3/4-inch parallel cell, 3 inches4. Sensing Manifold: Copper manifold with bullet-nosed static pressure sensors positioned

on equal area basis.

deep.

2.10 THERMOSTATS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Erie Controls.2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.3. Heat-Timer Corporation.4. Sauter Controls Corporation.5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.7. McQuay International.8. Siemens.

B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.

1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.5. Short-cycle protection.6. Programming based on every day of week.7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard

disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto.8. Battery replacement without program loss.9. Thermostat display features include the following:

a. Time of day.b. Actual room temperature.c. Programmed temperature.d. Programmed time.e. Duration of timed override.f. Day of week.g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."



C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg Fset-point range, and 2 deg F

D. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.

maximum differential.

1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,

extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of

instrument.5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by

application.6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly

is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

E. Fire-Protection Thermostats: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction; with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F

1. Reset: Manual.

above normal maximum operating temperature, and the following:

2. Reset: Automatic, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control panel; with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to indicate operation.

F. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.

G. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, automatic reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches

1. Bulb Length: Minimum

of bulb length is equal to or below set point.

20 feet2. Quantity: One thermostat for every

.20 sq. ft.

H. Electric, High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, automatic resetswitch that trips if temperature sensed across any

of coil surface.

12 inches

1. Bulb Length: Minimum

of bulb length is equal to or above set point.

20 feet2. Quantity: One thermostat for every

.20 sq. ft.

I. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of

of coil surface.

25 psig, and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.



2.11 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves larger than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves larger than .

NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf

5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers larger than .

25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers larger than .

25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.b. Honeywell.c. Siemens.

2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.

3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft.b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals:

of damper.5 inch-lb/sq. ft.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: of damper.

4 inch-lb/sq. ft.d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals:

of damper.3 inch-lb/sq. ft.

e. Dampers with of damper.

2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm

f. Dampers with : Increase running torque by 1.5.

3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm

4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

: Increase running torque by 2.0.

5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators.7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 -V ac.8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers):

.Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F.



12. Run Time: 30 seconds.

2.12 DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance Inc.2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).4. United Enertech Corp.5. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch-minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch-minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch-thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8inches and length of 48 inches

1. Secure blades to

.

1/2-inch-

2. Operating Temperature Range: From

diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

minus 40 to plus 200 deg F3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.

.

4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf

2.13 CONTROL CABLE

; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that power supply is available to control units.

B. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.



B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

above the floor.

D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances.2. Public areas.3. Where indicated.

E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

H. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.

I. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway.3. Install concealed cable in raceway.4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path.5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against

abrasion. Tie and support conductors.6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables.7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration

of piping and equipment.



D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspectfield-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.4. Pressure test control air piping at 30 psig or 1.5 times the operating pressure for 24 hours,

with maximum 5-psig5. Pressure test high-pressure control air piping at

loss.150 psig and low-pressure control air

piping at 30 psig for 2 hours, with maximum 1-psig6. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator.

loss.

7. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required.

8. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.

9. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.10. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations.4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet

side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators.8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper

blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.11. Check DDC system as follows:



a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments.2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument.3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:

a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

5. Flow:

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.

6. Pressure:

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential

set at minimum.

7. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed.

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.



10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train The Authority's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."


4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1

SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models.



4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 5. Dielectric fittings.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by the Authority or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then



only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify COTR and the Authority no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without the COTR’s written permission.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding.3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,

and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1.


a. OmegaFlex, Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division. c. Titeflex.d. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.



2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Coating: PE with flame retardant.

a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets. Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.

5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. 6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded

connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets.

7. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.3 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.



4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.



2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig.



9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.



2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


2.4 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:



1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators

NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.


a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.


a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.



6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.





a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco-Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Piping shall be labeled to match facility standards as provided by the COTR.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply withthe International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

C. Locate valves for easy access.

D. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

E. Install piping free of sags and bends.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

G. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

H. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

I. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

J. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

K. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

L. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

M. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

N. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.




A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

3.5 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not over tighten.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers or supports for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:



1. NPS 1 and smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements of the Authority to match existing facility standards for the identification for HVAC piping and equipment for piping and valve identification.

3.9 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements of the Authority for painting exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel. d. Color: to be determined by the COTR.

C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.





B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:


C. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:


3.13 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.

3.14 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:



1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, regular-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor’s Quality Control Program




[THIS PAGE BLANK]


HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1

SECTION 232113 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HYDRONIC PIPING



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Condensate-drain piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

B. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.

C. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified by the manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join fiberglass piping with manufacturer-recommended adhesive.

B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

.


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products.c. Victaulic Company.

2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricatedEPDM gasket rated for minimum

, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting.

230 deg F

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.



2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:


a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.b. IPEX Inc.c. KBi.

2. CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one Schedule 80 solvent-cement-joint end.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:


a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.b. IPEX Inc.c. KBi.d. NIBCO INC.

2. MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC union. Include brass or copper end, Schedule 80 solvent-cement-joint end, rubber gasket, and threaded union.





a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.



c. Hart Industries International, Inc.d. Jomar International Ltd.e. Matco-Norca, Inc.f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psigc. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

.

C. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psigc. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

.

d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

D. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection.b. Grinnell Mechanical Products.c. Matco-Norca, Inc.d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.e. Victaulic Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.b. Electroplated steel nipple; complying with ASTM F 1545.c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg Fd. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

.

e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.



2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type K, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping to permit service of all nearby equipment.

C. Install piping at indicated slopes.

D. Install piping free of sags and bends.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Pipe size is to be greater of required manufacturer connection size and size indicated on drawings.

G. Install unions in piping, NPS 2

H. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers andSupports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Install Roof Top Mounted Supports for all condensate drain piping.2. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe.



C. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

intervals between floors.

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. All turns of 90 degrees or more shall be accomplished by using a plugged tee fitting to permit condensate line cleanout.

C. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

D. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

F. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints exposed for examination during test.2. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water.3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure, but not less than 100 psig. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

3. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 15 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

4. Prepare written report of testing.




4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

METAL DUCTS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Double-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.3. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.4. Double-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.5. Sheet metal materials.6. Duct liner.7. Sealants and gaskets.8. Hangers and supports.9. Seismic-restraint devices.


1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and designcriteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:



1. Liners and adhesives.2. Sealants and gaskets.3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.4. Elevation of top of ducts.5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.6. Fittings.7. Reinforcement and spacing.8. Seam and joint construction.9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses.2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.3. Reinforcement details and spacing.4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.b. Air outlets and inlets.c. Speakers.d. Sprinklers.e. Access panels.f. Perimeter moldings.



B. Welding certificates.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



1. McGill AirFlow LLC.2. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

B. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for the inner duct.

C. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

D. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible."

E. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible."

F. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

mean temperature.

3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.4. Cover insulation with Mylar film complying with UL 181, Class 1.

G. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch

H. Formed-on Transverse Joints (Flanges): Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1,"Rectangular Duct/Traverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

.

I. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.




a. Lindab Inc.b. McGill AirFlow LLC.c. SEMCO Incorporated.d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse joints in ducts larger than 60 inches

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

in diameter: Flanged.

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than

in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

72 inches

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

2.4 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Lindab Inc.2. McGill AirFlow LLC.3. SEMCO Incorporated.4. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension) of the inner duct.



C. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

a. Transverse joints in ducts larger than 60 inches

2. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

in diameter: Flanged.

a. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches

b. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than

in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

72 inches

3. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVACDuct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

D. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch

E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

.

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

mean temperature.

3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.

2.5 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.



2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. PVC-Coated, Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G902. Minimum Thickness for Factory-Applied PVC Coating:

.4 mils thick on sheet metal

surface of ducts and fittings exposed to corrosive conditions, and minimum 1 mil

3. Coating Materials: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on ducts listed and labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 181, Class 1.

thick on opposite surface.

D. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

F. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209

G. Factory- or Shop-Applied Antimicrobial Coating:

Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

1. Apply to the surface of sheet metal that will form the interior surface of the duct. An untreated clear coating shall be applied to the exterior surface.

2. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have a hardness of 2H, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 3363.

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

5. Shop-Applied Coating Color: Black.6. Antimicrobial coating on sheet metal is not required for duct containing liner treated with

antimicrobial coating.

H. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

I. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches

2.6 DUCT LINER

.

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."




a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.b. Johns Manville.c. Knauf Insulation.d. Owens Corning.e. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F

2) Type II, Rigid:

mean temperature.

0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

mean temperature.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.b. Armacell LLC.c. Rubatex International, LLC.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."



C. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from galvanized carbon-steel washer.

0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches

D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

in diameter.

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping.5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners

.4 inches from corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

longitudinally.

a. Fan discharges.b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than

2500 fpm

9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

or where indicated.

a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch

10. Terminate inner ducts with build outs attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated build outs (metal hat sections) or other build out means are optional; when used, secure build outs to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.



2.7 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches.3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

, positive and negative.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

.

10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

, positive and negative.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.2. Type: S.3. Grade: NS.4. Class: 25.5. Use: O.6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California




E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.static-pressure class, positive or negative.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.

2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.



B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches

K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.



3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg

6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than

and Lower: Seal Class B.

2-Inch wg

7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

:Seal Class A.

8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg

10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than

and Lower: Seal Class C.

2-Inch wg

11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

: Seal Class B.

12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than

thick.

4 inches5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

thick.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

of each branch intersection.



E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16feet

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher than 2-inch wg

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by the COTR, for cleanliness

according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."



a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply withDivision 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. See Specification Section 230130.51 – “HVAC Air Distribution System Cleaning” for cleaning requirements.



3.9 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Downstream of Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:


3. Ducts Connected from Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units to Terminal Units:


4. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:


C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 4-inch wg.



b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3.

D. Liner:

1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 2 inches thick.2. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 2 inches thick.

E. Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation:

1. Supply Air Ducts: 2 inches thick.

F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

or lower:

2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm


:

2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm


or higher:

2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."



a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm

2) Velocity

or lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

1000 to 1500 fpm

3) Velocity

: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

1500 fpm

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

or higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

G. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpmb. Velocity

or lower: 90-degree tap.1000 to 1500 fpm

c. Velocity : Conical tap.

1500 fpm


or higher: 45-degree lateral.

4.1 GENERAL




AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.2. Manual volume dampers.3. Control dampers.4. Duct-mounted access doors.5. Flexible connectors.6. Flexible ducts.7. Duct accessory hardware.



B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.b. Manual volume damper installations.c. Control damper installations.d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G902. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

.

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.4. Duro Dyne Inc.5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.



6. Lloyd Industries, Inc.7. Nailor Industries Inc.8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.10. Ruskin Company.11. SEMCO Incorporated.12. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm

D. Maximum System Pressure:

.

1-inch wg

E. Frame:

.

0.052-inch-

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch-thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges.

thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Nonferrous metal.2. Diameter: 0.20 inch

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.3. Electric actuators where indicated on plans.4. Chain pulls.5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gageb. Sleeve Length:

minimum.6 inches

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

minimum.

7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel.8. Screen Type: Insect.9. 90-degree stops.



2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.d. McGill AirFlow LLC.e. METALAIRE, Inc.f. Nailor Industries Inc.g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.h. Ruskin Company.i. Trox USA Inc.j. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064-inch

b. Mitered and welded corners.

minimum thickness, matching duct material.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch

6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.

thick, matching duct material.

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

B. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.d. McGill AirFlow LLC.



e. METALAIRE, Inc.f. Nailor Industries Inc.g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.h. Ruskin Company.i. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.4. Frames:

a. Hat shaped.b. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inchc. Mitered and welded corners.

thick.

d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.b. Opposed-blade design.c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.d. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

thick.

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg

8. Blade Seals: Neoprene.


9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel.10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.11. Accessories:

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.

C. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 1-inch2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

diameter.

3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

D. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.hexagon locking nut.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.



2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS


1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.4. Duro Dyne Inc.5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.6. Greenheck Fan Corporation.7. Lloyd Industries, Inc.8. M&I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M&I Heat Transfer Products Ltd.9. McGill AirFlow LLC.10. METALAIRE, Inc.11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.12. Nailor Industries Inc.13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.14. Ruskin Company.15. Vent Products Company, Inc.16. Young Regulator Company.

B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

C. Frames:

1. Hat shaped.2. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch3. Mitered and welded corners.

thick.

D. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches2. Opposed-blade design.

.

3. Galvanized steel.4. 0.064 inch5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.

thick.

6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-

1. Operating Temperature Range: From

diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

minus 40 to plus 200 deg F

F. Bearings:

.

1. Oil-impregnated bronze.2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg

3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.




2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 24 inches

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

wide and double wall for larger dimensions.


1. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.3. Nailor Industries Inc.4. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2

1. Door:

, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."



a. Double wall, rectangular.b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.c. Vision panel.d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inche. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors less than 12 inchesb. Access Doors up to

square: No hinges and two sash locks.18 inches

c. Access Doors up to square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

24 by 48 inches

d. Access Doors larger than

: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

24 by 48 inches

C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure

class.3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure

ducts.4. Factory set at pressure indicated on duct schedule.5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.6. Hinge: Continuous piano.7. Latches: Cam.8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch-

2.8 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Flame Gard, Inc.3. 3M.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch

D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

carbon steel.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F

F. Minimum Pressure Rating:

.

10-inch wg, positive or negative.



2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Inc.3. Ventfabrics, Inc.4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

1. Minimum Weight: 2. Tensile Strength:

26 oz./sq. yd.480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch

3. Service Temperature: in the filling.

Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F

F. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.

.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch

2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

movement at start and stop.


1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.2. McGill AirFlow LLC.3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil.



1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg2. Maximum Air Velocity:

positive or negative.5000 fpm

3. Temperature Range: .

Minus 100 to plus 435 deg F

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

.

1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg2. Maximum Air Velocity:

positive or negative.5000 fpm

3. Temperature Range: .

Minus 20 to plus 250 deg F4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

.

D. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

, to suit duct size.

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of Pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.



F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters.3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.4. At drain pans and seals.5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.6. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot7. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.

spacing.

8. Control devices requiring inspection.9. Elsewhere as indicated.

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

I. Access Door Sizes:

1. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches2. Head and Hand Access:

.18 by 10 inches

3. Head and Shoulders Access: .

21 by 14 inches4. Body Access:

.25 by 14 inches

5. Body plus Ladder Access: .

25 by 17 inches

J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

.

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg

M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum

and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

12-inch

N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with minimum and maximum

lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

60-inch

O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

Q. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans.




A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.


4.1 GENERAL




PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, ROOF TOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 1

SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, ROOF TOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, roof top units with the following components and accessories:

1. Direct-expansion cooling. 2. Electric/Gas-heating coils. 3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section. 4. Integral, space temperature controls. 5. Roof curbs.

B. This Section is representative of the materials, installation, and other additional requirements for refurbishing the existing units identified on the contract drawings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.

C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations.

D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs.

E. Outdoor air is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

F. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged outdoor, Roof Top Units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

G. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

H. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.



I. VVT: Variable-air volume and temperature.


A. Delegated Design: Design RTU supports to comply with wind performance requirements, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Wind-Restraint Performance:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. 2. Building Classification Category: I. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft multiplied by the maximum area of the mechanical component

projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Components being replaced as part of a unit refurbishment.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.

3. Wind Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached. 2. Roof openings 3. Roof curbs and flashing. 4. Recommended service clearances.



B. Manufacturer Wind Loading Qualification Certification: Submit certification that specified equipment will withstand wind forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article and in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of wind force and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 1. Furnish and install new air filters for all RTU units in project at turnover.


A. ARI Compliance:

1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. McQuay International Inc. 2. Trane. 3. York International Corporation. 4. United Technologies, Carrier Corporation.

2.2 CASING

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall (units 10 tons of cooling and above) or single-wall insulated panels (units below 10 tons of cooling), fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.

B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

1. Casing shall be designed in such a way as to not condense water on the exterior of that casing at the following design conditions:

a. Dry Bulb: 95°F. b. Wet Bulb: 80°F.

2. Exterior Casing Thickness: Minimum 0.079 inch thick.

C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: Minimum 1 inch.



3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.

4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of 304L stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1.

1. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple. Coordinate drain connection on proper side of unit.

E. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2.3 FANS

A. Units under 10 Tons of Cooling: Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Single or Double width, forward curved or backward inclined, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, ECM motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.

B. Units 10 Tons of Cooling or above: Belt Driven Supply-Air Fans: Single or Double width, forward curved or backward inclined, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.

C. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.

D. Relief-Air Fan: Propeller, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor.

2.4 COILS

A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

2. Condensate Drain Pan: 304L Stainless steel formed with pitch and drain connections complying with ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

2. Provide Hail Guard to protect coil from hail, fly debris, and damage by large objects without increasing unit clearances

C. Electric-Resistance Heating:

1. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium, supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame. Terminate



elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

2. Overtemperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically reset, thermal-cutout, safety device; serviceable through terminal box.

3. Overcurrent Protection: Manual-reset thermal cutouts, factory wired in each heater stage. 4. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection.

Include the following controls:

a. Magnetic contactors. b. SCR Controller: Pilot lights operate on load ratio, a minimum of five steps. c. Time-delay relay. d. Airflow proving switch.

2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Manufacturer standard. Minimum of 4 circuits for units 10 tons of cooling and above.

B. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

C. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 10. Hot-gas reheat solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil. 11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil. 12. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion

valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator. 13. Insulate all refrigerant liquid lines not located in the supply air stream with 2 inch

elastomeric insulation.

D. The unit shall be capable of operating up to 125 deg F ambient dry bulb without modifying the refrigerant charge in the unit.

2.6 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Pleated: Minimum 40 percent arrestance, and MERV 8.



2.7 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 50 percent outdoor air, with motorized damper filter.

B. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position. 2. Relief-Air Damper: Motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen

and hood.

2.8 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION

A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.9 CONTROLS

A. See Contract Drawings for sequence of operation and control points.

B. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control-voltage transformer. 2. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features:

a. Heat-cool-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. c. Fan-speed switch. d. Automatic changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. f. Concealed set point. g. Concealed indication. h. Degree F indication. i. Unoccupied-period-override push button. j. Data entry and access port to input temperature set points, occupied and

unoccupied periods, and output room temperature, supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status.

3. Unit-Mounted Annunciator Panel for Each Unit:

a. Lights to indicate power on, cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or failure.

b. DDC controller or programmable timer and interface with HVAC instrumentation and control system.

c. Digital display of outdoor-air temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters.



C. DDC Controller:

1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. 2. Safety Control Operation:

a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.

b. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply air temperature is less than 40 deg F.

c. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence.

3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on 365-day clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day.

4. Unoccupied Period:

a. Heating Setback: 10 deg F. b. Cooling Setback: 10 deg F. c. Override Operation: Two hours.

5. Supply Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.

6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors, and operate hot-gas bypass to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain discharge temperature. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to maintain setback temperature.

c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump.

7. Gas Furnace Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Stage burner to maintain discharge temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain setback temperature.

8. Electric-Heating-Coil Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Stage coil to maintain discharge temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Energize coil to maintain setback temperature.

9. Fixed Minimum Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Open the outdoor-air damper. b. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor-air damper.

10. Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:



a. Occupied Periods: Open to fixed minimum intake, and maximum 100 percent of the fan capacity to comply with ASHRAE Cycle II. Controller shall permit air-side economizer operation when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F. Use mixed-air temperature and select between outdoor-air and return-air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers. Start relief-air fan with end switch on outdoor-air damper. During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper. c. Outdoor-Airflow Monitor: Accuracy maximum plus or minus 5 percent within 15

and 100 percent of total outdoor air. Monitor microprocessor shall adjust for temperature, and output shall range from 2- to 10-V DC.

D. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation. 2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic

code storage. 3. Provide BACnet compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the

following:

a. Adjusting set points. b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. c. Inquiring data to include outdoor-air damper position, supply- and room-air

temperature, humidity, compressor status, and all data points available to the unit controller.

d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations. e. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads. f. Monitoring variable-frequency drive operation. g. Monitoring cooling load. h. Monitoring economizer cycles. i. Monitoring air-distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F temperature in gas burner compartment.

B. Units below 10 Tons of Cooling: Externally field-mounted, Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required.

C. Units 10 Tons of Cooling and above: Factory mounted, Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.

D. Drain pan w/ integral float switch shall be provided. Upon detection of high water in the primary condensate pan the float switch shall shut off the associated RTU. External water level monitoring devices are not permitted.

E. Low-ambient kit using variable-speed condenser fans for operation down to 35 deg F.

F. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.



G. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

2.11 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Provide adapter curbs for all existing openings.

C. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.

1) Thickness: 3 inches.

b. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.

1) Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

c. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

d. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity.

e. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Curb Height: 14 inches minimum.

E. Wind and Seismic Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to match RTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for wind-load requirements.

F. Curb is to be painted with unit number and date of installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.



B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. Examine existing RTUs required be refurbished for existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts.” Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts to resist the lateral and uplift forces.

B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate penetrations and flashing with wall/roof construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts. Install wind restraints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 REFURBISHMENT ACTIONS

A. Fans: For all existing units requiring fan refurbishments perform the following actions:

1. Mounting: Verify and repair as necessary that the fan is secure on mountings and supporting devices.

2. Electrical Connections: Verify and repair as necessary that the connections to electrical components are complete and proper thermal and over-current protection is installed for motors and starters.

3. Filters: Replace all filters in-kind. 4. Belts: Replace and re-tension all belts to manufacturers recommended settings. 5. Bearings: Replace and lubricate all fan and fan motor bearings. 6. Linkages: Lubricate and repair as necessary all fan and damper linkages (including

variable-inlet vanes). 7. Fan Blades / Wheels: Replace damaged fan blades and rebalance fan assembly.

B. Coils: Clean and comb straight all coils (evaporator and condenser).

C. Drain Pan: Replace existing condensate drain pan with a manufacturer provided 304L stainless steel drain pan.

D. Condensate Drain: Replace condensate drain and trap assemblies as noted on the contract drawings. Provide new supports as detailed on the contract drawings. Wood block supports are not an acceptable substitution.

E. Refrigerant Lines:



1. Insulate all refrigerant liquid lines not located in the supply air stream with 2 inch elastomeric insulation.

2. Replace all refrigerant fittings and joints ½” or greater in size. Reconnect per the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.

F. Controls Interface: Provide a new BACnet compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the following:

a. Adjusting set points. b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. c. Inquiring data to include outdoor-air damper position, supply- and room-air

temperature, humidity, compressor status, and all data points available to the unit controller.

d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations. e. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads. f. Monitoring variable-frequency drive operation. g. Monitoring cooling load. h. Monitoring economizer cycles. i. Monitoring air-distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest gutter drain.

B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section “Facility Natural-Gas Piping.” Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Connect return and supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in

Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.




1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Connect and purge gas line. 12. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. 14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and

binding. 16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner

for peak efficiency.

a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Inspect operation of power vents. c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.



e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration.

f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

21. Calibrate thermostats. 22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 23. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 24. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a

minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.

26. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.

a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c. Relief-air volume. d. Outdoor-air intake volume.

27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air

intake.

28. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following:

a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger. b. Low-temperature safety operation. c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover. e. Relief-air fan operation. f. Smoke and firestat alarms.

29. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.

3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. This includes a visit to adjust refrigerant charge as required on a day where the ambient outdoor air



temperature is above 90°F. Provide up to four visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Authority's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."


4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IT1001 CONCOURSE C/D REHABILITATION: 2010/2011 - RTU SEPTEMBER 14, 2010

_________________________________________________________________________________ COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IT1001 CONCOURSE C/D REHABILITATION: 2010/2011 - RTU SEPTEMBER 14, 2010

_________________________________________________________________________________ COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 2

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


4.1 GENERAL




LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.




A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Match equipment lug and termination ratings for conductors.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:

1. Cerro Wire & Cable.2. Encore Wire.3. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

1. Feeder and branch circuit conductor insulation shall be rated for 600V and 75 degrees C.2. Adjust conductor ampacity per NEC 310.16 for lugs and terminations rated below 75

degrees. Coordinate with equipment suppliers and other trades.

D. Multiconductor Cable with ground wire: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for:

1. Armored cable, Type AC.2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC.3. Mineral-insulated.4. Metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.5. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM.6. Type SO.7. Type USE.

E. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.

F. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

G. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.

H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.

I. Conductor sizes are based on copper.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.2. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.3. 3M; Electrical Products Division.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

B. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Pull all conductors into raceway at the same time.

F. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

G. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"and NFPA 70.

H. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and NFPA 70.

I. Examination:

1. Verify that the interior of building has been protected from weather.2. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.3. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.4. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.



J. Preparation

1. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.2. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 8 inches of slack.


A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.

B. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer’s recommended values.

C. Verify proper phasing of connections.


4.1 GENERAL




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel slotted support system.2. Conduit and cable supports.3. Structural stud support.4. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.


a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.b. ERICO International Corporation.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation.d. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

in diameter.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

D. Do not use spring-steel clamps.



3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

.

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.thick.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.




4.1 GENERAL




RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.



2. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.3. Robroy Industries.4. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

F. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.b. Type: compression.

2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Adalet.2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.3. EGS/Appleton Electric.4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.5. Hoffman; a Pentair company.6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.8. RACO; a Hubbell Company.9. Robroy Industries.10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.12. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.



G. Gangable boxes are allowed.

H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

I. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

2. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.3. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

trade size.

1. EMT: Use compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.2. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All conduits shall be marked every 150’ indicating its use.



B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

C. Keep raceways at least 6 inches

D. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

E. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

F. Support within 12 inches

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

of changes in direction.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

of enclosures to which attached.

J. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

K. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

L. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch

M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than

trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

O. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.



P. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches

Q. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with architectural requirements for penetrations and firestopping.


4.1 GENERAL





[THIS PAGE BLANK]


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Equipment identification labels.5. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1to 2 inches

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

wide.

2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch

PART 3 - EXECUTION

. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.



B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.2. Power.3. UPS.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 3 inchesfrom terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.



C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags.

D. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.high.

c. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Enclosed switches.


4.1 GENERAL




WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

WIRING DEVICES



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. SPD: Surge Protection Device.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.




A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Authority-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Wiring Device Manufacturers':

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, Heavy Duty/Industrial Grade: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Install with ground socket up.2. Terminate at screw down terminals or with factory pre-wired plugs.3. Color: Selected by the Authority.4. Style: Duplex.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed or non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, Heavy Duty/Industrial Grade:

1. Install with ground socket up.2. Terminate at screw down terminals or with factory pre-wired plugs.3. Color: Selected by the Authority.4. Integral test and reset buttons.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, cast aluminum with lockable, in-use cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.



B. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

C. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches5. Use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly

clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

in length.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

D. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles with the neutral blade at the top.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.



5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.


4.1 GENERAL




FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches,switchboards, enclosed controllers and motor-control centers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.


FUSES 262813 - 2

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Edison Fuse, Inc.3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.


FUSES 262813 - 3

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class J, time delay and Class T, fast acting.2. Feeders: Class L, fast acting.3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.5. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


4.1 GENERAL




FUSES 262813 - 4

[THIS PAGE BLANK]


ENCLOSED SWITCHEDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).4. Molded-case switches.5. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Current and voltage ratings.3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.



1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:



1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.



E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

I. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

J. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.6. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay.7. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-

fault protection function.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.3. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.



5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

B. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:



a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.


4.1 GENERAL




DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Smoke detectors. 2. Remote Test Switch.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

C. cd: Candela rating.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Non-coded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only.

B. Non-coded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only.



B. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by COTR prior to submitting them to the authorities having jurisdiction.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data, " deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in the most current edition of NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to the most current edition of NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to the most current

edition of NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire alarm control panel.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data

files.3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by NICET certified technicians of any level. A certified NICET Level III technician must be present on site supervising installation at all times.

C. Source Limitations for Fire Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in the most current edition of NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to the most current edition of NFPA 72 by an NRTL.



F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to the most current edition of NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

G. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to the most current edition of NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an FMG-approved alarm company.


A. Interruption of Existing Fire Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire alarm service to facilities occupied by the Authority or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the Architect, Construction Manager, Fire Department and the Authority no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption of fire alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm service without Architect's or the Authority's written permission.

1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building. Use a 1 ½” black on white p-touch tape crack and peal with 1 ¼” lettering.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire alarm equipment and wiring.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.

2.2 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire alarm control panel.



4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire alarm control panel for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire alarm control panel.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire alarm control panel for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire alarm control panel to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire alarm control panel and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire alarm control panel, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire alarm control panel and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire alarm control panel, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.



2.3 DUCT DETECTOR TEST SWITCH

A. Switch Module will be a key activated device that will functionally test a detector, it must be compatible with smoke and duct detectors used on Fire Alarm System. The switch must include a red LED that will illuminate when the corresponding duct detector is in alarm. The switch will operate in conjunction with a relay module. The switch will mount to a single gang electrical box and include a red cover plate labeled with the corresponding duct detector. When the switch is operated a signal will be transmitted to the appropriate duct detector simulating an alarm. That alarm will activate all functions programmed for the duct detector. The switch will provide a true functional test of the actions associated with the corresponding duct detector on the system as required. The switch shall be mounted inside the rooftop unit or in a NEMA 4 enclosure mounted to the exterior of the rooftop unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the most current edition of NFPA 72 for installation of fire alarm equipment.

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend

existing monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with the most current edition of NFPA 72 and the most current edition of NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

D. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire alarm control panel.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire alarm control panel and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire alarm control panel.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the most current edition of NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in the most current edition of NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in the most current edition of NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in the most current edition of NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in the most current edition of NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.



F. Fire alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in the most current edition of NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Authority's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire alarm system.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’s QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

